What did The Warehouse Group Limited announce?

The Warehouse Group Limited (NZX: WHS) filed “The Warehouse Group FY26 Annual Results” with NZX on 29 September 2026, as a full year results announcement.

From the announcement:“While the Board is pleased with the progress made, materially improving profitability remains our primary ambition." 1 FY25 was a 53-week financial year ending 3 August 2025, compared to 52 weeks in FY26.”
When was it filed?
29 September 2026
Where is the original?
NZX announcement
The Warehouse Group Limited logo

The Warehouse Group FY26 Annual Results

Full Year Results29 September 2026WHSConsumer Discretionary

1



NZX | Media release – 30 September 2026

The Warehouse Group reports strong profit growth in FY26

Summary for the 52 weeks ended 2 August 2026:

• Reported sales were $3.0 billion, down 1.9% on a 53-week FY25, up 0.4% on a

comparative 52-week same-store basis

1


• Group gross profit margin up 40 basis points to 32.6%

• Cost of doing business reduced by $29.8 million to 31.8% of sales, an improvement

of 40 basis points

• Operating profit

2

(EBIT pre-NZ-IFRS 16) increased to $22.6 million from $1.3 million

in FY25

• Reported net profit after tax increased to $11.2 million from $2.8 million net loss after

tax in FY25

• Operating cash flow improved by $121.2 million to $193.5 million, capital expenditure

increased to $21.1 million from $12.4 million in FY25 with investment primarily

directed to stores

• Net debt reduced to $17.0 million from $96.1 million in FY25

• No final dividend has been declared for FY26

The Warehouse Group today announced a strong recovery in profitability, with comparable

store sales holding broadly steady despite continued pressure on discretionary spending.

Gross margin improved and costs reduced as a proportion of sales, while stronger cash flow

supported increased investment in store upgrades and foundations for future growth.

Chair John Journee said the result demonstrates that the actions taken to date are delivering

results.

"Despite a difficult retail environment, The Warehouse Group made meaningful progress

during the year. Sales were steady on a comparable basis, profitability improved, and the

business finished the year in a much stronger position.

“Importantly, this progress was driven by actions taken within the business rather than an

improvement in market conditions, creating a stronger foundation for the next stage of our

recovery. While the Board is pleased with the progress made, materially improving

profitability remains our primary ambition."


1

FY25 was a 53-week financial year ending 3 August 2025, compared to 52 weeks in FY26. Same-store sales

removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, NLG Commercial, and the impact of opening and closing of

stores during the reported and comparable year.

2

Operating Profit (EBIT pre-IFRS16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP

measure.

2

Group sales were $3.0 billion, down 1.9% on the prior year which included an additional

week of trading. Sales increased 0.4% on a comparative 52-week same-store basis.

Consumer confidence fluctuated throughout the year. Confidence improved through the first

half as interest rates eased, signalling a possible recovery. However, international conflict,

higher fuel prices and renewed pressure on household budgets weighed on consumer

sentiment later in the year. Customers remained value conscious with average selling prices

down 1.4%. Across the brands, customers spent more per visit and purchased more items,

with average basket value up 0.5% and units sold up 1.8%.

Group gross profit margin increased 40 basis points to 32.6%, while cost of doing business

reduced 40 basis points to 31.8% of sales. It was the first year since FY21 that gross margin

improved while costs reduced as a percentage of sales.

Margin growth was supported by stronger buying and retailing discipline, improved ranges,

tighter inventory management and a higher proportion of full-price sales. Combined with

sustained cost discipline, this delivered an operating profit of $22.6 million, up from $1.3

million in the prior year. Margin recovery accelerated through the second half across all three

brands.

Group Chief Executive Officer Mark Stirton said, "This result shows that the internal changes

we're making are starting to get traction. Warehouse Stationery and Noel Leeming delivered

strong profit growth, and The Warehouse finished the year in much better shape than it

started.

"Our teams have worked incredibly hard through another year of significant change. We're

buying better, managing inventory more effectively, improving our ranges and pricing, and

running the business with greater discipline. At the same time, we're investing again in

stores, the brand, customer experience and growth. We've made a good start, but our

ambitions are much bigger, especially for The Warehouse where we’re determined to earn

back our place as New Zealanders' first choice retailer."

Store development

The Group balanced cost reductions with selective investments in retail experience

upgrades that support customers and growth. Capital expenditure increased to $21.1 million

from $12.4 million in the prior year.

The Warehouse stores are receiving upgrades to lighting, flooring and racking, alongside

new displays and visual merchandising in homewares, apparel and beauty.

In FY26 the Group returned to expanding its store footprint. Warehouse Stationery opened in

Wellington Central and Noel Leeming relocated its Palmerston North store. Since August

2026, Warehouse Stationery has opened in Whitianga and Noel Leeming has opened its

Auckland Central flagship store. In late 2027, the Group will open The Warehouse and Noel

Leeming stores in Mangawhai.

“We are investing selectively in better presentation, more relevant and exciting stores, and

new locations because we can see opportunities to grow all of our brands and serve more

customers," said Mark Stirton.

3

Brand performance

The Warehouse

The Warehouse made progress during the year, particularly in the second half. Sales were

$1,774.9 million, down 2.3% on the reported 53-week FY25. Sales increased 0.6% on a

comparative 52-week same-store basis. Online sales represented 4.4% of sales, compared

with 4.6% in FY25, and actions to improve the profitability of online sales resulted in

meaningfully stronger operating margins versus the prior year.

Gross profit margin was 20 basis points below FY25 but recovered through the second half,

with fourth-quarter margin finishing strongly ahead of the prior year. After the allocation of

support office costs, the brand reported an operating loss of $7.5 million, an improvement of

$4.7 million on the prior year's operating loss of $12.2 million.

“At The Warehouse, we are improving the style, quality and presentation of our ranges,

particularly in homewares and apparel. These categories represent 50% of revenue and

were key contributors to the brand’s improved second-half margin performance, with more

apparel sold at full price during the year and margins improved across homewares,” said

Mark Stirton.

Beauty sales increased 5.2% on a comparable 52-week basis as customers responded to

broader ranges and improved in-store presentation. The Warehouse remained New

Zealand's preferred toy retailer for a second consecutive year, with record toy sales. The

Warehouse simplified its grocery range to pantry staples and everyday essentials, resulting

in improved category performance.

“Grocery is an important reason customers choose to shop with us regularly. Rather than

expanding the range, we’re concentrating on the staples customers buy most often and

where we can offer the best value, like bread, eggs, coffee and olive oil. A simpler range

allows us to deliver lower prices and a more reliable top-up shop for our customers.”

“This year, we undertook an extensive review of our customer segments, providing valuable

insights into what matters most and how best to reach them. Our new brand platform, This Is

Warehouse Country, marks the next phase for The Warehouse, building on what New

Zealanders have loved since 1982 while refreshing the offer and experience for modern

families.”

Warehouse Stationery

Warehouse Stationery delivered a strong result, returning to sales growth and nearly

doubling operating profit.

Sales increased 0.7% to $227.6 million against a 53-week FY25, while 52-week same-store

sales increased 2.0%. Online sales represented 7.1% of sales, broadly in line with the prior

year. Operating profit increased to $15.9 million from $8.2 million in the prior year.

Disciplined pricing and stock management supported gross profit growth across every

category, with margin strengthening through the second half.

Growth was supported by strong performances across Warehouse Stationery’s key

categories. Print & Create sales increased 13.8% on a comparable 52-week basis, Art &

Craft sales increased 6.7%, and Office Furniture sales increased 5.5%.

4

“Warehouse Stationery’s result shows there is still significant growth opportunity in a well-

established brand. We are serving more schools, strengthening our position with small

businesses and seeing strong demand across creative categories, while operating the

business more effectively,” said Mark Stirton.

Noel Leeming

Noel Leeming made the largest contribution to the Group's earnings recovery.

Sales were $1,017.4 million, down 2.0% on the reported 53-week FY25. On a comparable

52-week basis, same-store sales were down 0.5% while total sales (including on-line)

decreased 0.2%. Online sales increased to 13.1% of sales from 11.3% in the prior year.

Noel Leeming maintained pricing discipline in a highly competitive market and delivered

margin growth across both halves. Operating profit increased to $21.8 million from $11.7

million in the prior year.

Appliances delivered the strongest growth during the year, with sales increasing 11.2% on a

52-week basis, led by whiteware and small appliances. Cellular sales increased 4.7% and

Computers & Storage increased 10.6%, supported by new brands and customer demand

linked to the Windows 10 and 3G transitions. Services, including delivery, installation and

Tech Solutions, grew 10.1% during the year.

“In an extremely competitive market, Noel Leeming remained disciplined and responsive to

pricing and promotional activity, while still delivering a strong result. Looking ahead, we see

opportunities to grow market share through an expanded store and product offer as New

Zealand’s leading locally owned technology and appliances retailer,” said Mark Stirton.

Balance sheet

Buying and planning improved progressively in priority categories over the year, reducing

inventory to $438.8 million from $476.7 million and aged inventory to 21.8% from 23.1%.

Stock turn increased to 4.7 times from 4.6 times. Lower inventory levels and improved stock

movement supported stronger working capital performance and cash generation.

The Group generated free cash flow of $79.4 million, compared with an outflow of $45.2

million in the prior year. Net debt reduced by $79.1 million to $17.0 million.

Dividend

No final dividend has been declared for FY26. The Board's immediate priority is to rebuild

sustainable earnings while retaining financial flexibility.

Outlook

Sales in the first eight weeks of FY27 were broadly in line with the prior year, while margin

performance was ahead of the prior comparable period.

“With consumer confidence and economic growth subdued, retail conditions are expected to

remain challenging. We can't control those factors, so we're concentrating on improving the

areas within our control and delivering a better result regardless of market conditions.

5

“Improving performance at The Warehouse remains the Group's biggest priority. We will

achieve that by delivering better value and a better customer experience through more

relevant ranges, better pricing, better stock management and lower costs,” said Mark Stirton.

Ends

For media queries please contact: For investor queries please contact:

Lizzie Havercroft

General Manager Corporate Affairs

+64 27 507 0613

lizzie.havercroft@twgroup.co.nz

Mark O’Malley

Head of Strategy

+64 27 301 5936

mark.omalley@twgroup.co.nz


The Warehouse Group Limited

26 The Warehouse Way, Northcote, Auckland 0627

---

2026
Annual Results

52 WEEKS ENDING ​2 AUGUST 2026​

1

2
Contents

1.Chair Update - John Journee

2.CEO Update - Mark Stirton

3.Financial Performance - Stefan Knight

4.The Year Ahead - Mark Stirton

5.Thank You - John Journee

6.Appendix - Additional Information

2

3
Chair Update

John Journee

Chair

The Board’s perspective
●FY26 was the first full year under the brand-led operating model and demonstrated that the reset could deliver in a difficult consumer environment. Operating

profit recovered to $22.6m from $1.3m, driven by actions within the business rather than an improvement in market conditions

●Gross margin increased while the cost of doing business reduced, rebuilding operating leverage. Strong cash generation enabled the Group to reduce net debt by

$79.1m while increasing investment in its store network​

●Noel Leeming and Warehouse Stationery delivered stronger returns. The Warehouse also improved, but remains below an acceptable level of profitability, and its

recovery is the Group’s most important priority

●No final dividend has been declared for FY26. The Board’s immediate priority is to rebuild sustainable earnings while retaining financial flexibility. The Board

recognises the importance of dividends to shareholders and remains committed to returning to paying dividends in the future

4

Progress against the reset plan

CHAIR UPDATE

$3,027.6m

32.6%31.8%$22.6m$79.4m$17.0m

(1.9%) on a 53-week FY25

(0.2%) on a comparable 52 week

1

+0.4% same store sales

2

+40 bps on FY25

6

-40 bps on FY25

6

vs $1.3m in FY25vs ($45.2m) in FY25from $96.1m in FY25

GROUP SALESGROSS MARGINCODB

3

OPERATING PROFIT

4

FREE CASH FLOW

5

NET DEBT

1.Comparable 52 week removes the 53rd week of FY25​

2.Same store sales removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, NLG Commercial, and the impact of opening and closing of stores during the reported and comparable year​

3.Cost of Doing Business (CODB) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16, unusual items, and is a non-GAAP measure​

4.Operating Profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation between Operating Profit and Reported EBIT, refer to Slide 31 of this presentation and Note 2.0 of the financial statements​

5.Free cash flow is calculated as Operating cash flow less capital expenditure and lease principal payments​

6.Basis point movements are based on percentages rounded to the nearest 10bps and are so throughout the presentation

5
CEO Update

Mark Stirton

Group CEO

Consumer confidence improved through the first half of FY26 before falling due to international conflict and recovered towards the end of the financial
year. Despite the weaker environment, Group earnings improved

6

The market we traded through

MACROECONOMIC CONTEXT

C O N S U M E R C O N F I D E N C E T H R O U G H F Y 2 6 · A N Z-R O Y M O R G A N , M O N T H L Y

What it meant for our customers

●Higher prices put further pressure on household budgets and

discretionary spending​

●Real incomes declined, unemployment increased, and the first

OCR increase in three years added further pressure late in the year​

●Customers shopped less often and focused more on value​

●Customers bought more items, but at slightly lower average prices​

●Lower foot traffic was partly offset by larger baskets and broadly

stable conversion​

5.6%4.1%

Highest since

September 2015

Two-year high,

June qtr

UNEMPLOYMENT

1

INFLATION

1

+1.7%

Growth remains

subdued

ANNUAL GDP GROWTH

1

G R O U P M E T R I C S

2

F Y 2 6 V F Y 2 5

+1.8%

UNITS

-1.4%

ASP

-0.2%

FOOT TRAFFIC

+0.5%

BASKET SIZE

1.Source:https://www.stats.govt.nz (unemployment; June 2026 update, inflation; annual as at June quarter, GDP growth; annual as at June quarter)​

2.Group metrics shown have all been calculated on a 52-week same store sales basis, which removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, NLG Commercial, and the impact of opening and closing of stores during

the reported and comparable year​

Margin and cost discipline lifted earnings, while inventory management improved cash conversion ​
7

FY26 began to restore operating leverage and strengthened the balance sheet​

GROUP PERFORMANCE

1.Operating Profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation between Operating Profit and Reported EBIT, refer to Slide 31 of this

presentation and Note 2.0 of the financial statements.​

2.Cost of Doing Business (CODB) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16, unusual items, and is a non-GAAP measure​

3.Free cash flow is calculated as Operating cash flow less capital expenditure and lease principal payments​

4.Basis point movements are based on percentages rounded to the nearest 10bps and are so throughout the presentation

P R O F I T R E C O V E R YO P E R A T I N G L E V E R A G EB A L A N C E S H E E T

$22.6m

32.6%31.8%

GROSS MARGINCODB / SALES

OPERATING PROFIT

+$21.3m

year-on-year improvement

Profit improved on broadly flat

comparable sales

+40 bps

4

Margin and cost as % of sales

improved together

FIRST TIME SINCE FY21

-40 bps

4

The two levers are rebuilding

operating leverage

$79.4m$17.0m

FREE CASH FLOWNET DEBT

Net debt reduced by $79.1m

Cash conversion strengthened

financial flexibility and supported

investment in-store​

Lower inventory supported the

improvement

The financial platform is now more resilient, yet profitability still sits well below our ambitions​

8
How we went against what we said we would do

1

GROUP PERFORMANCE

1.As set out in the FY25 Annual Results investor presentation — Looking ahead. ​

2.Cost of Doing Business (CODB) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16, unusual items, and is a non-GAAP measure

MET

Overhead reductions​

PARTIALLY MET

Gross margin recovery​

NOT MET

The Warehouse margin recovery​

MET

Working capital unlocks​

MET

Disciplined capital investment​

MET

Retail-led strategy​

$29.8m CODB

2

reduction; support office costs down 8.8%​

Group margin increased 40bps, led by the second half. Two out of three brands showed full year growth​

Exited Q4 ahead, but full-year margin remained below FY25 with deeper clearance of aged inventory​

$22.9m working-capital inflow; inventory down $37.9m​

$21.1m in capital expenditure, reweighted toward stores and supply chain

Retail-led strategy and execution priorities are set and in action

9
Rebuilding retail fundamentals​

RETAIL FUNDAMENTALS

1.Same store sales removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, NLG Commercial, and the impact of opening and closing of stores during the reported and comparable year​

In FY26 we strengthened how we choose product, move it through the network and convert customer demand, with early evidence visible in

lower inventory, better gross margin and store execution. However, we recognise there is further work to be done.

PLAN & BUYMOVESELL

Better sell-through, margin discipline

and inventory productivity​ in key

departments

Getting product to customers at lower costStores, brand and conversion

CAPABILITIES BUILT

Grocery simplified as a value-led top-up offer

supporting broader shopping missions​

Buying and planning reset for all three brands,

with stricter stock investment criteria​

Ranges, price points and sourcing

strengthened in priority categories while

ensuring we maintain value on key items​

CAPABILITIES BUILT

Dedicated supply chain leadership and a new

freight partner​ with improved capabilities

Independent review of integrated supply chain

highlighting opportunities, several changes

now underway

Streamlined online distribution to improve

service to customers, partnered with DoorDash

and reduced cost to serve online

CAPABILITIES BUILT

This Is Warehouse Country refreshed the

brand platform​

Store investment across all three brands and

visual merchandising uplift​

New formats developed to broaden

customer appeal ​

FUTURE

UNLOCKS

AN EARLY EVIDENCE POINT​

−$37.9m​

GROUP INVENTORY

Lower cost to serve, faster flow,

improved availability and a

scalable network​

FUTURE

UNLOCKS

AN EARLY EVIDENCE POINT​

4.7x

GROUP STOCK TURN

(FY25: 4.6x)

Improving foot-traffic, higher

conversion, stronger baskets and

better store economics​

FUTURE

UNLOCKS

AN EARLY EVIDENCE POINT​

+0.4%​

GROUP SAME-STORE

SALES

1

What we sell and what it costs​

10
Focus is moving from flat sales to sustainable revenue growth​

REVENUE GROWTH

FY26 comparable sales were broadly flat. Our focus is to turn stronger retail fundamentals into sustainable revenue growth and gain back share​.

BRAND-LED GROWTH​

Clear routes to growth for each brand​

THE WAREHOUSEWAREHOUSE STATIONERYNOEL LEEMING

Leverage brand platform and

reappraisal to drive foot-traffic

Strengthen product relevance,

ranges and value

Invest in stores and build local

relevance based on customer

segmentation

Grow business & education​

Expand Print & Create,

personalisation and services​

Reach more customers through

new formats, new stores and

improved online channels

Win share in priority categories

and younger customer groups​

Differentiate through expert

service and solutions

Grow national store network, roll-

out interactive store concepts and

accelerate online

Focus on growth categories,

including Health & Beauty

11
People, communities and environment​

ESG

FY26 progress across our team, communities and environmental impact​

$1.9m​

contributed to New Zealand

charities and communities

Award Winner

The Good Drop won the Spark Retail NZ

2026 Awards KNAPP Sustainability

Leadership Award​

90%​

of electricity matched with electricity

produced by Lodestone Energy's solar

farms (FY25: 63%)

74%

Scope 1 and 2 market-based

emissions change compared to

FY23 base year (FY25: 45%)

28.3

Per million hours

worked (FY25: 30.2)

25 eNPS

1

Group eNPS (FY25: 36)

284

Post consumer waste collected

for reuse or recycling

79%

of operational waste diverted

from landfill (FY25: 79%)

492

Tier 1 factory ethical

assessments completed in

FY26

reduction

tonnes

EMISSIONSTRIFR

(Total recorded injury frequency rate)​

TEAM ENGAGEMENT

CIRCULARITYOPERATIONAL WASTEETHICAL SOURCING

1.eNPS (employee Net Promoter Score) in FY25 excludes DC team members as these were not surveyed in FY25

12

13
Financial

Performance

Stefan Knight

Group CFO

Operating profit improved by $21.3m on broadly flat comparable sales, as higher gross margin and lower operating costs rebuilt operating leverage
FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE

1.Comparable 52 week removes the 53

rd

week of FY25

2.Same store sales removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, NLG Commercial, and the impact of opening and closing of stores during the reported and comparable year

3.Operating Profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation between Operating Profit and Reported EBIT, refer to Slide 31 of this presentation

and Note 2.0 of the financial statements

4.Adjusted NPAT is before continuing operations before unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation between Adjusted and Statutory NPAT, refer to slide 31

5.Reported NPAT is attributable to shareholders and is adjusted for minority interests

Year in Review

•Operating profit increased to $22.6m from $1.3m,

driven by improved margin and cost discipline in a

challenging consumer environment

•Gross margin increased 40bps to 32.6%, with a

90bps second-half improvement led by

Warehouse Stationery and Noel Leeming and

supported by The Warehouse’s recovery in Q4

•Cost of doing business reduced by $29.8m, or 3.0%,

and improved 40bps to 31.8% of sales, led by lower

support office, IT and depreciation costs

•Both levers, margin and cost, moved the right way

in the same year — the first time since FY21

•The seasonal second-half loss narrowed to $4.3m

from $18.2m, contributing $13.9m of the Group’s

$21.3m full-year earnings improvement

$ million

FY26

52 weeks

FY25

53 weeks

Var

Sales revenue3,027.63,086.7(1.9%)

Gross profit986.6995.1(0.9%)

Gross margin %32.6%32.2%+40 bps

Cost of doing business964.0993.8(3.0%)

CODB % of sales31.8%32.2%(40) bps

Operating profit³22.61.3+$21.3m

Operating margin %0.7%0.0%+70 bps

Adjusted NPAT⁴13.5(4.5)+$18.0m

Reported NPAT

5

11.2(2.8)+$14.0m

Dividend declared---

REPORTED REVENUE

$3,027.6m

COMPARABLE 52 WEEKS

1

(0.2%)

SAME-STORE SALES²

+0.4%

Group financial performance

14

GROUP GROSS PROFIT MARGIN · % OF SALES
THE WAREHOUSE , GP % BY QUARTER · STRONG FINISH IN RED

Group

•Group gross profit margin increased 40bps to 32.6%, with the full-year

improvement delivered through a 90bps uplift in the second half

•The Warehouse was the primary driver, as first-half clearance activity gave

way to stronger underlying trading margins in the fourth quarter

•Noel Leeming and Warehouse Stationery also delivered improved margin

performance through the year, supporting a broader-based Group recovery

The Warehouse

•First-half margin reflected the clearance of aged inventory from prior years, with the impact

reducing as the year progressed

•Fourth-quarter margin increased to 36.9% led by Home and Apparel

•The Warehouse exited FY26 with cleaner inventory, improved trading mechanics and

refreshed ranges heading into FY27

•We seek further opportunity for margin expansion as fundamental retail capability is restored

and new ranges support more full price sales

H1 (20)bps · H2 +90bps

Full year 32.6% vs 32.2% +40bps

Gross margin overview

Group gross profit margin increased 40bps to 32.6%, driven by an improved second-half from all three brands and a strong fourth-quarter contribution

from The Warehouse

15

FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE

1.Operating profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation between Operating Profit and Reported EBIT, refer to Slide 31 of this
presentation and Note 2.0 of the financial statements

2.Cost of Doing Business (CODB) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16, unusual items, and is a non-GAAP measure

GROSS PROFIT MARGIN AND COST OF DOING BUSINESS² · % OF SALES

Overview

•Gross margin increased to 32.6%, while the cost of doing

business reduced to 31.8% of sales

•This lifted operating profit to $22.6m and operating margin to

0.7%

•At the Group’s current sales base, every 10bps of operating

margin represents approximately $3m of operating profit¹

•All three brands contributed to the second-half improvement:

Warehouse Stationery maintained its stronger performance,

Noel Leeming continued to improve margin, and The

Warehouse recovered strongly in Q4

•Improvement occurred alongside inventory discipline, with

Group inventory reducing by $37.9m and aged inventory also

declining by 130 bps

16

Operating leverage returns for the first time since FY21

FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE

Gross margin improved and the cost of doing business reduced in FY26, lifting operating margin

0.7%

FY25:0.0% - a 70bps improvement

FY26 OPERATING MARGIN

The cost reset programme
•Cost of doing business

1

reduced by $29.8m, reflecting delivery of the cost reset programme and

the additional trading week in FY25

•CODB

1

improved by 40bps to 31.8% of sales, making a material contribution to the Group’s

profitability uplift

•Employee expenses reduced by $6.9m, with savings from the support office restructure and TCS

partnership partly offset by higher store and distribution centre wages primarily driven by wage

inflation

•Employee expenses also benefited from one-off savings arising from the timing of the TCS

implementation

•IT costs reduced by $12.6m, driven by lower support charges and more disciplined project

activity

•Further benefits came from lower SaaS and advertising costs

•Depreciation and amortisation reduced by $9.1m as earlier system and previous store

investment programmes continued to amortise and capital expenditure was tightly managed

1.Cost of Doing Business (CODB) excludes the impact of NZIFRS 16, unusual items, and is a non-GAAP measure

2.Approximately $4m of FY25 Brand and SSO comparatives have been reclassified to align with FY26 and future allocation basis

As % of sales

32.6%

32.2%

31.8%

CODB

1

BY ALLOCATION $ MILLION

FY26

52 weeks

FY25

2

53 weeks

Variance

Brand costs683.8682.5+0.2%

Support office costs226.2248.1(8.8%)

Depreciation & amortisation54.063.2(14.5%)

Total cost of doing business964.0993.8(3.0%)

CODB BY CATEGORY $ MILLION

CODB Overview

17

FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE

1.Comparable 52 week removes the 53rd week of FY25
2.Same store sales removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, and the impact of opening and closing of stores during the reported and comparable year

3.Foot traffic and basket size are calculated on a 52 week same store basis

4.Operating Profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure

5.Sales density is calculated on a 52-week basis

The Warehouse reduced its operating loss in FY26, supported by a stronger

second half. The immediate aim is to return the brand to profitability

Performance

•Same-store sales increased as customers bought more items, partly offset by lower

average prices in a value conscious market

•Gross margin improved in the second half and exited the year ahead of FY25, with the

strongest improvement in Q4

•Home and Apparel led the margin recovery, reinforcing the importance of these higher

margin categories to The Warehouse’s earnings

•Lower foot traffic was offset by better conversion and larger baskets, with customers

making fewer but more valuable visits

•Online sales remain an area of opportunity. New offers, including The Warehouse Club and

DoorDash, supported customer engagement, while stronger online margins more than

offset lower sales

FY26

52 weeks

FY25

53 weeks

Var

Sales ($ m)1,774.91,816.5(2.3%)

Operating profit / (loss) ($ m)(7.5)(12.2)+$4.7m

Operating margin (0.4%)(0.7%)+30 bps

Online sales ($ m)78.683.2(5.5%)

Online penetration4.4%4.6%(20) bps

Stores (#)8484—

Sales density

5

($/sqm)3,9013,870+0.8%

18

The Warehouse

BRAND PERFORMANCE

SAME-STORE SALES²

+0.6%

BASKET SIZE³

+0.8%

OPERATING PROFIT⁴ / (LOSS)

$(7.5)m

Improved by $4.7m, with most of the

improvement in the second half

UNITS +1.7% | ASP (1.0%)

$1,774.9m

VS COMPARABLE 52

WEEKS

1

(0.7%)

SALES

FOOT TRAFFIC (0.3%)

Home and Apparel margins improving
Home and Apparel are important to The Warehouse’s profitability, representing nearly half of sales and including some of its highest-margin

categories. Margins improved in both areas through better buying, stronger ranges and improved execution

Behind the improvement: stronger buying and planning discipline, rebuilt ranges and price points

Next: continue strengthening ranges, full-price sell-through and margin delivery across Home and Apparel

HOME AND APPAREL · CASH GROSS MARGIN %, FY22–FY26

Up in both

FY26

Apparel

Home

WHAT DROVE FY26

APPAREL

✓

More full-price sales — supported by better sell-through

✓

Better margins – across full-price and clearance sales

✓

Broad-based improvement: led by Womenswear, with Menswear and

Kidswear also ahead

HOME

✓

Aged inventory reduced—margins improved even though we cleared more

stock

✓

Home Textiles led the improvement, with Home Furnishings, Seasonal

Home and Seasonal Appliances also ahead

→

Gardening and Storage volumes increased, but at lower margins

19

BRAND PERFORMANCE - THE WAREHOUSE

FY26
52 weeks

FY25

53 weeks

Var

Sales ($ m)227.6226.0+0.7%

Operating profit / (loss) ($ m)15.98.2+$7.7m

Operating margin 7.0%3.6%+340 bps

Online sales ($ m)16.215.8+2.5%

Online penetration7.1%7.0%+10 bps

Stores (#)6766+1

Sales density

5

($/sqm)4,3414,297+1.0%

1.Comparable 52 week removes the 53rd week of FY25

2.Same store sales removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, and the impact of opening and closing of stores during the reported and comparable year

3.Foot traffic is calculated on a 52 week same store basis

4.Operating Profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure

5.Sales density is calculated on a 52-week basis

Warehouse Stationery returned to sales growth and nearly doubled operating

profit, supported by stronger margins and disciplined cost and stock management

Performance

•Sales returned to growth with both standalone stores and the 42 stores within The Warehouse

contributing

•Operating profit increased $7.7m to $15.9m, with operating margin improving to 7.0%

•Growth was led by Print & Create, Art & Craft and Office Furniture

•Print & Create benefited from growth in digital printing, copying and personalised products. Art

& Craft and Office Furniture also grew, supported by stronger ranges

•Disciplined pricing and stock management supported gross profit growth across all categories

along with improved range

•One store opened in Wellington Central during FY26, followed by Whitianga at the start of FY27

20

Warehouse Stationery

BRAND PERFORMANCE

SAME-STORE SALES²

+2.0%

FOOT TRAFFIC³

+0.2%

Conversion improved too

OPERATING PROFIT⁴ / (LOSS)

$15.9m

Up 94% on FY25 operating profit of

$8.2m

UNITS +3.4% | ASP (1.3%)

$227.6m

VS COMPARABLE 52

WEEKS

1

+2.5%

SALES

Profit up $10.1m on flat comparable sales. Noel Leeming ran a better business in
FY26 and is now investing to grow it

Performance

•Comparable sales were broadly flat, with non-repeatable commercial sales in the prior year being offset by

underlying growth in the retail business

•Operating profit increased by $10.1m to $21.8m, with operating margin improving to 2.1%

•Appliances and core technology led growth, supported by commercial wins, new brands and the Windows 10

and 3G transitions

•Intense competitor pricing in audio-visual and computing weighed on sales, with Noel Leeming maintaining

pricing discipline to protect margin and gain share where product and service are a difference

•Online grew strongly and now accounts for around one dollar in eight of the brand’s sales

•Investment in the store network continues, with Queen Street opened in September 2026 and Mangawhai

planned for late 2027

•Looking ahead we are focused on returning to top line growth and maintaining market share. We will do this by

capitalising on our scale advantage and continuing to make service a clear point of difference for customers

21

Noel Leeming

BRAND PERFORMANCE

SAME-STORE SALES²

(0.5%)

ONLINE SALES GROWTH³

+13.2%

Improved on-line traffic and conversion

OPERATING PROFIT⁴ / (LOSS)

$21.8m

Up $10.1m on FY25

UNITS (3.9%) | ASP +3.6% | FOOT TRAFFIC

3

(0.5%)

$1,017.4m

VS COMPARABLE 52

WEEKS

1

(0.2%)

SALES

$ million

FY26

52 weeks

FY25

53 weeks

Var

Sales ($ m)1,017.41,038.1(2.0%)

Operating profit ($ m)21.811.7+$10.1m

Operating margin2.1%1.1%+100 bps

Online sales

5

($ m)133.0117.5+13.2%

Online penetration13.1%11.3%+180 bps

Stores (#)6666—

Sales density

6

($/sqm)12,73412,724+0.1%

1.Comparable 52 week removes the 53rd week of FY25

2.Same store sales removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, and the impact of opening and closing of stores during the reported and comparable year

3.Foot traffic is calculated on a 52 week same store basis

4.Operating Profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure

5.Online sales in FY25 was stated as $108.7 million. This has been re-stated to $117.5 million in this presentation recognising a reclassification of commercial online sales

6.Sales density is calculated on a 52-week basis

($96.1m)
Opening

net debt

+$193.5m

Operating

cash flow

($19.4m)

Capital

expenditure

2

($94.7m)

Lease

payments

($0.3m)

Other¹

($17.0m)

Closing

net debt

Free cash flow

1

: $79.4m

FREE CASH FLOW

$79.4m

A $124.6m improvement from FY25

AVERAGE DAILY BORROWINGS

-45% reduction

Against FY25 daily average

BANK INTEREST COST

$2.7m

Reduced 60% on lower debt levels

WHAT IT SAYS

•Operating cash flow improved by $121.2m to $193.5m, supported by

stronger trading performance and improved working capital. FY25 was

impacted by an extra week of negative net cash-flow

•Free cash flow increased to $79.4m from an outflow of $45.2m in FY25,

after capital expenditure and lease payments

•Capital expenditure increased 54% to $19.4m as investment shifted

towards stores, while net debt reduced by $79.1m to $17.0m

•The Group remains compliant with all banking covenants and has access

to available facilities to meet its needs

1.Free cash flow is calculated as Operating cash flow less capital expenditure and lease principal payments

2.The difference between cash flow capital expenditure of $19.4 million above and capital expenditure of $21.1m on the Project expenditure

slide and in Note 9.1 and Note 9.2 of the financial statements is due to timing of accruals and creditor payments

22

Cash flow and net debt

GROUP PERFORMANCE

Strong operating cash flow funded increased capital investment and reduced net debt by $79.1m to $17.0m

Closing inventory declined by $37.9m, reflecting lower aged stock and faster Group stock turn, while further improvement remains a priority
CLOSING INVENTORY · $ MILLION

562.3

FY22

493.3

FY23

472.1

FY24

476.7

FY25

438.8

FY26

−$37.9m

vs FY25

$438.8m

CLOSING INVENTORY

FY25 $476.7m

21.8%

AGED INVENTORY

1

FY25 23.1%

4.7x

GROUP STOCK TURN

FY25 4.6x

INVENTORY BY BRAND · $ MILLION

The Warehouse +

Warehouse Stationery

FY25

345.8

FY26

309.2

−10.6%

Noel Leeming

FY25

131.0

FY26

129.6

−1.0%

PRUDENT PROVISIONING

$18.9m

inventory provisions

4.7% of inventory cost, up

from 3.7%

COMMENTARY

Lower inventory was driven primarily by The Warehouse and Warehouse Stationery, including a $19.7m reduction in goods in transit.

Aged inventory reduced to 21.8% from 23.1%, while provisions increased to address selected aged, slow-moving and end-of-life stock.

The reset supports stronger stock flow and working-capital discipline, while clearance plans remain actively managed.

1.Aged inventory calculated as stock over six months old

23

Inventory improvements strengthened the balance sheet

GROUP PERFORMANCE

Project expenditure
TOTAL PROJECT EXPENDITURE

1

$27.8m

FY25: $21.0m

CAPITAL EXPENDITURE

$21.1m

76% of project spend

PROJECT EXPENDITURE BY CATEGORY · $ MILLION

$ millionFY26FY25

Store development, operations & property13.07.3

Information systems10.113.1

Digital3.30.1

Supply chain1.40.5

Total project expenditure27.821.0

of which capital expenditure21.112.4

of which SaaS & project opex6.78.6

WHAT IT SAYS

•Total project expenditure increased $6.8m to $27.8m, with the investment

mix shifting toward capital expenditure

•Capital expenditure increased $8.7m to $21.1m, primarily reflecting higher

investment in store development, operations and property. Digital and supply

chain capital investment also increased

•Key investments include fit-out of new stores and relocations, improved LED

lighting and HVAC in stores and in-store digital screen deployment

•SaaS and project opex reduced $1.9m to $6.7m. The reduction was

concentrated in information systems, partly offset by higher digital and

supply chain project opex

1.Total project expenditure includes capital expenditure, prepayments, SaaS expenditure and project operating expenditure

24

GROUP PERFORMANCE

Investment lifted in capital expenditure led by stores, operations and property

Store development,

operations & property

Information

systems

Digital

Supply chain

FY26

FY26 capitalFY26 SaaS & opex

FY25

FY25 capitalFY25 SaaS & opex

25
Mark Stirton

Group CEO

The Year Ahead

The year ahead
TRADING UPDATE

Trading in the first eight weeks of FY27: Group sales were broadly in line with the prior year, with

margin performance ahead of the prior comparable period

ENVIRONMENT

The retail environment remains challenging, with cautious consumer spending and continued

volatility. We will remain focused on the factors within our control

THE WAREHOUSE

Margin recovery at The Warehouse remains our most important earnings priority, while

continuing to deliver value for our customers. This will be supported by continued improvements

in product ranges, pricing, merchandise planning and inventory management

DISCIPLINE

Cost, capital and working-capital discipline will continue, alongside further work to strengthen

sourcing, supply-chain performance and inventory productivity across the Group

BRAND AND STORE

GROWTH

We will invest selectively to grow each of our retail brands, strengthening The Warehouse

customer proposition, growing Noel Leeming and Warehouse Stationery, and investing in new and

existing stores where we see attractive returns.

INVESTOR DAY

The launch of This Is Warehouse Country marks the next phase of The Warehouse’s recovery,

with our longer-term retail-led strategy and pathway to stronger, more sustainable returns to be

presented at Investor Day in November

2026 ANNUAL RESULTS

26

Building
exceptional

retail brands

27

28
Appendix

29 Sales summary

30 Quarterly sales by brand

31 EBIT and NPAT reconciliation

32 Investor metrics

33 Disclaimer

28

$ million
The

Warehouse

Warehouse

Stationery

Noel

Leeming

Group

FY26 reported sales (52 weeks)1,774.9227.61,017.43,027.6

FY25 reported sales (53 weeks)1,816.5226.01,038.13,086.7

FY26 growth on reported FY25(2.3%)+0.7%(2.0%)(1.9%)

FY25 sales on a 52-week basis1,787.7222.01,019.03,034.8

FY26 growth on 52-week FY25(0.7%)+2.5%(0.2%)(0.2%)

FY26 same-store sales growth (52 weeks)+0.6%+2.0%(0.5%)+0.4%

FY26 H1 sales (26 weeks)949.5116.1542.21,612.1

FY25 H1 sales (26 weeks)944.7109.8548.91,607.2

H1 growth+0.5%+5.7%(1.2%)+0.3%

FY26 H2 sales (26 weeks)825.4111.5475.21,415.5

FY25 H2 sales (27 weeks, as reported)871.8116.2489.21,479.5

H2 growth on reported FY25(5.3%)(4.0%)(2.9%)(4.3%)

H2 growth on 26 comparable weeks(2.1%)(0.6%)+1.1%(0.9%)

29

Sales summary

APPENDIX

$ millionQ1Q2Q3Q4FY
Q4 on 13

comparable wks

The Warehouse — FY26389.0560.5405.3420.11,774.9

— FY25386.3558.4415.9455.91,816.5

— growth+0.7%+0.4%(2.5%)(7.9%)(2.3%)(1.6%)

Warehouse Stationery — FY2652.263.957.154.4227.6

— FY2550.958.958.857.4226.0

— growth+2.6%+8.5%(2.9%)(5.2%)+0.7%+1.9%

Noel Leeming — FY26230.7311.5236.6238.61,017.4

— FY25229.1319.8234.9254.31,038.1

— growth+0.7%(2.6%)+0.7%(6.2%)(2.0%)+1.4%

Group (incl. Other) — FY26674.1938.0700.8714.73,027.6

— FY25668.0939.2710.5769.03,086.7

— growth+0.9%(0.1%)(1.4%)(7.1%)(1.9%)(0.3%)

30

Quarterly sales by brand

FY26 versus FY25 as reported. The 53rd week fell in the FY25 fourth quarter; a 13-week comparison is shown for Q4.

APPENDIX

Operating ProfitNPAT
2

$ millionFY26FY25FY26FY25

Reported earnings56.640.511.2(2.8)Statutory

Restructuring costs5.7—4.3—Head office redundancies

Adjustments for NZ IFRS 16

1

(39.7)(39.2)(2.0)(1.7)Lease accounting

Adjusted earnings22.61.313.5(4.5)Non-GAAP

RESTRUCTURING

•Restructuring costs of $5.7m before tax relate to head-office redundancies

arising from the cost reset programme and TCS partnership

NZ IFRS 16

•Operating Profit excludes NZ IFRS 16 to maintain comparability with historical

performance and common market practice. The FY26 adjustment was $39.7m

at EBIT and $2.0m at NPAT

1.Refer to Note 2.2 of the Financial Statements for further details on the NZ IFRS 16 adjustment

2.Adjusted NPAT is from continuing operations before unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. A reconciliation between Adjusted and Statutory NPAT is located in Note 5.0 of the financial statements.

31

EBIT and NPAT reconciliation

For the 52 weeks ended 2 August 2026

APPENDIX

FY26FY25
Returns

Return on equity

1

3.8%(0.8%)

Return on net operating assets

2

3.6%3.0%

Dividend payout ratio——

Cash generation

Free cash flow

3

$79.4m$(45.2)m

Cash conversion ratio

4

1.29x(0.50)x

Stock turn (times)4.74.6

Gearing

Net debt$17.0m$96.1m

Gearing (net debt over net debt plus equity)5.2%24.3%

Profitability

Gross profit margin32.6%32.2%

CODB as a percentage of sales31.8%32.2%

Operating profit margin0.7%0.0%

1.Return on Equity is calculated as Net Profit from Continuing Operations After Tax / average Shareholder Equity

2.Return on Net Operating Assets is calculated as Net Operating Profit After Tax (excluding interest) / average Net Operating Assets

3.Free cash flow is calculated as Operating cash flow less capital expenditure and lease principal payments

4.Cash conversion is calculated as Operating cash flow / EBITDA on a pre-IFRS 16 basis

32

Investor metrics

APPENDIX

32

This presentation may contain forward looking statements and projections. There can
be no certainty of the outcome and projections involve known and unknown risks,

uncertainties, assumptions and other important factors that could cause the actual

outcomes to be materially different from the events or results expressed or implied by

such statements and projections.

While all reasonable care has been taken in the preparation of this presentation, The

Warehouse Group Limited does not make any representation, assurance or guarantees

as to the accuracy or completeness of any information in this presentation. The forward-

looking statements and projections in this report reflect views held at the date of this

presentation.

Except as required by applicable law or any applicable Listing Rules, the Relevant

Persons disclaim any obligation or undertaking to update any information in this

presentation.

A number of non-GAAP financial measures are used in this presentation. You should not

consider any of these in isolation from, or as a substitute for, the information provided in

the financial statements for the 52 weeks ended 2 August 2026, which are available at

www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz.

This presentation does not constitute investment advice, or an inducement,

recommendation or offer to buy or sell any securities in The Warehouse Group Limited.

33

Disclaimer

---

2026
Annual Report

THE WAREHOUSE GROUP

32
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026

Table of Contents

2026 at a Glance 4

Chair’s Report 6

CEO’s Report 8

Financial Review 12

Purpose, Ambition and Values 16

Integrated Report 18

Risk Management 20

Our Stores and Supply Chain 24

Our Brands 26

Financial Statements 32

Independent Auditor’s Report 52

Governance Report 58

Statutory Disclosures 76

Directory 83

The Warehouse Group Board and Executive Leadership

Team are pleased to present our FY26 Integrated Annual

Report.

John Journee

Chair

30 September 2026

Dean Hamilton

Audit and Risk Committee Chair

30 September 2026

54
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 20262026 at a Glance

2026 at a Glance

Our impact

Group performance

Cost of doing

business % of sales

2

52-week same-

store sales

1

FY25: 32.2%

Market-based (compared

to FY23 base year)

0.4%

31.8%

Group sales

Group operating profit

3

FY25: $1.3m

$3.0b

$22.6m

Group gross

profit margin

32.6%

contributed to

NZ charities and

communities

in FY26

$1.9m

eNPS

(FY25: 36.0pts)

25.0pts

74%

1. Same-store sales removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, NLG Commercial, and the impact of opening and closing of stores

during the reported and comparable year.

2. Cost of doing business (CODB) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16, unusual items, and is a non-GAAP measure.

3. Operating profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure.

Reduction in

scope 1 & 2

emissions

Down 1.9% on a

53-week FY25

FY25: 32.2%

54

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 20262026 at a Glance

It has been another challenging year for
New Zealand consumers. There were

early signs that consumer confidence was

beginning to improve around summer,

before international conflict created

renewed uncertainty and increased pressure

on fuel, freight, inflation and global supply

chains.

Despite this backdrop, the Group

delivered improved performance. Sales

remained steady on a comparable basis,

and operating profit materially improved

on FY25, supported by disciplined cost

management, margin expansion, and

operational improvements across the

business. While these are positive indicators

of the turnaround underway, there is

still significant work ahead to restore

sustainable returns for shareholders.

The Board is pleased with the progress

made during FY26. Margin improvement

initiatives gained traction in Noel Leeming

and Warehouse Stationery, and positive

signs emerged in The Warehouse during the

fourth quarter. However, the turnaround of

The Warehouse remains critical to improving

overall Group performance.

Throughout FY26, the Board supported the

business through considerable change and

uncertainty. This included the turnaround

initiatives, cost reset programme,

responding to the impacts of geopolitical

disruption and rising fuel and freight costs,

and initiating the strategic partnership with

Tata Consultancy Services. The Board has

supported management in creating a clear

brand focused retail-led strategy.

We welcomed Hamish Rumbold to

the Board in November 2025. Hamish

has brought valuable governance and

commercial experience that further

strengthens the Board. Also in November

2025, Dame Joan Withers and Robbie

Tindall retired from the Board. On behalf of

the Board, we sincerely thank Dame Joan

Chair’s

Report

John Journee | Chair

The Board is pleased with

the progress made during

FY26, with improvement

initiatives gaining

traction.

and Robbie for their longstanding and valuable

contributions and service to The Warehouse

Group.

FY26 marked Mark Stirton’s first full year as

Group Chief Executive Officer, and he has

wasted no time getting stuck into the work

at hand. Mark and his leadership team have

brought focus, passion, pace and discipline

to the business. They have aligned on a

clear strategic direction, acted decisively,

strengthened execution and rallied the

organisation around its customers and

brands. I thank them for their leadership and

commitment.

The Board has carefully considered the

payment of a dividend for FY26.

While performance improved during the

year, the Board has decided not to declare a

final dividend for FY26. Our priority remains

restoring financial performance and ensuring

the Group can continue investing in the actions

required to support the turnaround. The

Board retains its intention to resume dividend

payments in the future.

Looking ahead, the Group continues to

take decisive action. We will maintain cost

and capital discipline, strengthen retail

fundamentals, improve customer experience

and implement a retail strategy that builds

brand equity and delivers sustainable returns.

Economic recovery in New Zealand continues

to be slow, consumers remain cautious with

their spending, with market conditions likely

to remain challenging in the near term. The

Group’s path forward will take time, however

the Board is confident in the calibre of

management, the direction being taken, the

actions underway and the progress being

made.

This is my first Annual Report as Chair of The

Warehouse Group, and I would like to thank

Dame Joan for her guidance during my

transition to the role and my fellow directors

for their support during the year. Having served

on the Board and in executive roles across the

business, including as Interim Group Chief

Executive Officer, it is a privilege to continue

serving this iconic New Zealand business as we

work to restore its performance and realise its

potential.

Finally, a heartfelt thank you to our leadership

team and our team members across New

Zealand. Over the past year, they have

continued to serve customers, adapt to

significant change and support one another

through a demanding period, all while making

steady progress.

To our shareholders, thank you for your ongoing

support. We know there is more work to

do, and we remain determined to improve

performance.

Ngā mihi,

John Journee

Chair

76

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Chair’s Report

CEO’s
Report

Mark Stirton | Group CEO

FY26 was a year of progress for The

Warehouse Group and the first full financial

year of a brand-led operating model.

The Group focused on what it could control

to improve performance and store experience

in a tough environment where customers

remained cautious in a volatile economy.

Financial performance improved, costs were

reduced and the work to strengthen retail

fundamentals began to show through across

the business. These are positive signs, but

profitability remains below our ambitions

and there is much more work ahead.

Financial performance

The Group delivered sales of $3.0 billion,

down 1.9% on FY25 and up 0.4% on a

52-week same-store sales basis.

Group gross profit margin was 32.6%, an

improvement of 40 basis points. Noel Leeming

and Warehouse Stationery delivered solid margin

growth through the year. The Warehouse’s

margin was broadly flat for the full year and

improved in the second half, supported by

more full-price sales and margin growth

in the key areas of Home and Apparel.

Group operating profit increased to $22.6

million, compared with $1.3 million in FY25. This

improvement reflected gross margin growth and

sustained cost discipline across the Group.

All three brands contributed to the improvement

in profitability. Warehouse Stationery nearly

doubled profit and Noel Leeming made the largest

contribution to the Group’s earnings recovery.

The Warehouse reduced its operating loss from

FY25 and ended the year in a better position.

In November 2025 the Group announced a

cost reset programme and its intention to

reduce cost of doing business to below 31%

of sales. Group cost of doing business was

$964.0 million, or 31.8% of sales, compared

with 32.2% in FY25. This was achieved

by reducing Store Support Office costs

and simplifying the operating model.

The balance sheet was rebuilt during FY26,

with $79.4 million of free cash flow generated

and net debt reduced to $17.0 million from

$96.1 million in FY25. Inventory was $438.8

million, down 7.9%, with improved stock health,

better stock turn and lower aged inventory.

The majority of remaining aged inventory is

made up of everyday continuity products that

continue to have ongoing sales demand.

Although an important improvement on FY25,

our performance is not yet at an acceptable

level of return. Further margin recovery at

The Warehouse, continued cost discipline

and stronger inventory performance remain

critical to lifting Group profitability.

Strengthening the retail

fundamentals

The Group has made headway

strengthening the retail fundamentals

required to improve performance.

As signalled at the end of the first half, the

Group began work to improve supply chain

performance. An independent review identified

significant opportunities to improve product

availability and reduce cost to serve. Changes

are underway to unlock trapped value.

The Group’s partnership with Tata Consultancy

Services is helping simplify our technology

and managed services, reduce costs and

provide access to digital and AI capability.

At The Warehouse, work to improve

merchandise planning, ranging and inventory

management began to show through in

the second half, particularly in our priority

categories Home and Apparel. While there is

more work to do, the second half provided early

signs that these changes are gaining traction.

The Warehouse completed significant customer

segmentation during the year. Built on real

spending data, behavioural insights and

research, this work has created a much clearer

understanding of our customers and will

shape future decisions across merchandise,

marketing, stores and customer experience.

Progress has been made,

but our ambitions are

much bigger.

9

CEO’s Report

8

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026

11
Investing in our stores

Cost reduction has been balanced with

selective investment in areas that support

customers, margin and growth.

Noel Leeming has returned to central Auckland

with a new flagship store designed around

modern, experience-led retail. Noel Leeming

also relocated its Palmerston North store.

Warehouse Stationery opened a standalone

store in Wellington Central and began

FY27 opening a new store in Whitianga.

Investment in The Warehouse continues across

store presentation, from lifting the basics like

lighting, racking and flooring, to stronger visual

merchandising of higher-margin categories

including Home, Apparel and Health & Beauty.


Leadership and capability

In FY26 we intentionally rebuilt the

Executive Leadership Team to support

the turnaround. These changes reflect

the areas most important to improving

performance and support clearer priorities.

Carrie Fairley was permanently appointed Chief

Merchandise Officer, with sourcing brought

under merchandise to create end-to-end

ownership of our product ranges. Lyle Brady was

appointed Group Chief Supply Chain Officer and

Deric Fairley appointed Acting Chief Planning

Officer. Frankie Coulter joined the business as

Chief Marketing Officer for The Warehouse and

Warehouse Stationery, and Ankit Gupta was

appointed Group Chief Data and AI Officer.

Looking ahead to FY27

The Group enters FY27 with clear priorities.

Cost and capital discipline will continue

alongside improvements in merchandise

planning, inventory management and

supply chain performance. Margin recovery

at The Warehouse remains central,

supported by continued investment in

product, stores and customer experience.

The brand relaunch This Is Warehouse Country

at the start of FY27 marks an important next

phase for The Warehouse and our ambition to

be New Zealand’s number one retailer again.

It reflects our confidence in the strength of

the brand and the opportunity ahead of us.

Over the past year, we have asked a great deal

of our people. Teams have worked through

significant change, and I thank our team

members for their commitment and the pride

they bring to serving customers every day.

I thank our Chair, John Journee and the Board

for their support as we have strengthened

the business and developed our strategy.

To our customers, thank you for continuing to

choose us. To our shareholders, thank you for

your patience and support. Progress has been

made, but our ambitions are much bigger.

Ngā mihi,

Mark Stirton

Group Chief Executive Officer

10

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026

Financial performance
FY26 was a standard 52-week financial year ending

2 August 2026, compared with a 53-week financial

year in FY25. Revenue commentary is shown on

both a reported basis and a comparable 52-week or

52-week same-store basis. Unless stated otherwise,

all commentary compares FY26 with the reported

53-week FY25 result.

Sales revenue

Against a backdrop of cautious consumer

sentiment, group sales were $3,027.6 million, down

1.9% on FY25.

The prior year included an additional trading week

worth $51.9 million of sales, which accounted for

most of the reported decline. On a comparable

52-week basis, group sales were broadly flat, down

0.2%, while same-store sales increased 0.4%.

Financial

Review

Customers remained value conscious

throughout the year. Across the Group,

customers bought more items at lower average

prices. Customers consolidated their shopping

trips: although store traffic eased by 0.2%,

customers purchased more on each visit,

lifting average basket value, while conversion

remained stable.

Online sales represented 7.5% of sales, up from

7.0% in FY25, with Noel Leeming making the

largest contribution to growth.

Gross profit margin

Group gross profit margin increased 40 basis

points to 32.6%, with Noel Leeming and

Warehouse Stationery ahead for the full year

and all three brands ahead in the second half.

Margin recovery accelerated in the second half,

with gross profit margin increasing 90 basis

points compared with the prior corresponding

period.

Noel Leeming and Warehouse Stationery

delivered solid margin growth through the year.

The Warehouse’s full-year margin was 20 basis

points below FY25, but it recovered through

the second half and finished the fourth quarter

strongly and ahead of the prior year.

Gross profit was $986.6 million compared with

$995.1 million in FY25. The difference reflects

the additional trading week included in FY25.

Cost of doing business

Cost of doing business reduced by $29.8 million

to $964.0 million and fell to 31.8% of sales from

32.2% in FY25. The result reflects the Group’s

cost reset programme and the additional

trading week included in FY25.

Employee costs were $6.9 million lower, with

savings from the support office restructure

partly offset by higher wages across stores and

distribution centres.

IT costs reduced by $12.6 million through lower

support charges and better control of project

spending. Depreciation and amortisation

reduced by $9.1 million as earlier technology

and previous store investment programmes

became fully depreciated or amortised.

Operating profit

FY26 was the first year since FY21 that the

Group lifted gross margin while reducing cost

of doing business as a percentage of sales,

contributing to operating profit increasing to

$22.6 million from $1.3 million in FY25.

The first half of the year focused on reducing

costs. The second half delivered stronger

margins, generating around two-thirds of the

full-year increase in operating profit.

All three brands contributed to the increase

in operating profit. Noel Leeming made the

largest contribution to the Group’s earnings

recovery, with operating profit increasing

to $21.8 million from $11.7 million in FY25.

Warehouse Stationery nearly doubled

operating profit to $15.9 million from $8.2

million, while The Warehouse reduced its

operating loss to $7.5 million from $12.2 million

in FY25.

Group operating profit

1

Cost of doing business as

a percentage of sales

2

Group gross profit margin

Operating margin

(FY25: $1.3m)

(FY25: 32.2%)

(FY25: 32.2%)

(FY25: 0.0%)

+$21.3m year-on-year

improvement

-40 basis points year-on-year

+40 basis points year-on-year

+0.7 percentage points

year-on-year

$22.6m

31.8%

32.6%

0.7%

1. Operating profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure.

2. Cost of doing business (CODB) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16, unusual items, and is a non-GAAP measure.

1312

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Review

Net profit
Adjusted net profit after tax

3

was $13.5

million, compared with a loss of $4.5 million

in FY25. Reported net profit after tax was

$11.2 million, compared with a loss of $2.8

million in FY25. Adjusted net profit after tax

excludes restructuring costs of $5.7 million

($4.3 million after tax) relating to the support

office restructure and Tata Consulting Services

partnership, and the effect of NZ IFRS 16; a

reconciliation is provided in note 5 to the

financial statements.

Brand performance

The Warehouse

The Warehouse made meaningful progress

during FY26, particularly in the second half of

the year.

Sales were $1,774.9 million, down 2.3% on FY25.

Sales increased 0.6% on a comparative 52-week

same-store basis. Customers purchased more

items at lower average prices in a highly value-

conscious market. Online sales represented

4.4% of sales, compared with 4.6% in FY25.

Gross margin for the full year was 20 basis

points below FY25 but recovered through the

second half and finished the fourth quarter

strongly and ahead of the prior year with the

recovery led by Home and Apparel. These

categories are central to The Warehouse’s

profitability, and in both, cash gross margin

improved through stronger trading execution

rather than changes in sales mix.

The operating loss reduced to $7.5 million

from $12.2 million in FY25, with most of the

improvement occurring in the second half.

Warehouse Stationery

FY26 was a standout year for Warehouse

Stationery. Sales returned to growth, operating

profit nearly doubled, and the brand recorded

the highest operating margin in the Group.

Sales were $227.6 million, up 0.7% on FY25.

Sales increased 2.0% on a comparative 52-week

same-store basis. Growth was driven by

both standalone stores and stores operating

within The Warehouse network. Online sales

represented 7.1% of sales, broadly in line with

FY25.

Margin performance strengthened through

the second half. Disciplined pricing and stock

management supported gross profit growth

across every category, contributing to operating

profit increasing to $15.9 million from $8.2

million in FY25.

Noel Leeming

Noel Leeming made the largest contribution

to the Group’s earnings recovery during FY26.

Operating profit increased significantly despite

continuing competitive pressure across key

technology categories.

Sales were $1,017.4 million, down 2.0% on FY25.

On a comparable 52-week basis, sales declined

0.2%, reflecting non-repeatable commercial

sales in the prior year. Excluding commercial

sales, the retail business grew. Same-store

sales declined 0.5% as customers made fewer

but larger purchases. Online sales grew and

represented 13.1% of sales, up from 11.3% in

FY25.

Noel Leeming maintained pricing discipline,

with margin growth across both halves

supported by higher average selling prices.

Appliances was the brand’s strongest category

this year and made a positive contribution to

margin growth. Together, these factors helped

lift operating profit to $21.8 million from $11.7

million in FY25.

Balance sheet

The balance sheet was significantly stronger at

the end of FY26 than a year earlier, reflecting

stronger cash generation, lower inventory and

reduced debt.

Operating cash flow increased to $193.5 million

from $72.3 million in FY25. Operating cash flow

is stated after interest on leases but before

lease principal payments of $94.7 million,

which are included in financing activities.

Free cash flow increased to $79.4 million

from an outflow of $45.2 million after capital

expenditure and lease payments.

Working capital reduced by $22.9 million

during the year, driven by a $37.9 million

reduction in inventory, partly offset by lower

trade payables. Bank interest paid was $2.7

million compared with $6.7 million in FY25, a

60% reduction, while lease principal payments

reduced to $94.7 million from $104.9 million.

Inventory reduced to $438.8 million from $476.7

million in FY25. Aged inventory reduced to

21.8% from 23.1%, while stock turn improved

to 4.7 times from 4.6 times. The reduction

was driven primarily by The Warehouse and

Warehouse Stationery and included lower

goods in transit holdings.

Net debt decreased to $17.0 million from $96.1

million in FY25, with average daily borrowings

reducing by 45%. The Group met all debt

covenant obligations throughout the year.

Project expenditure increased to $27.8 million

from $21.0 million in FY25, while capital

expenditure increased to $21.1 million from

$12.4 million. Investment was directed towards

stores, operations, property, digital and

supply chain initiatives, reflecting a shift from

major systems investment to improving and

expanding the store network.

Free cash flow

Capital

expenditure

Net debt

Closing inventory

(FY25: $(45.2)m)

(FY25: $12.4m)

(FY25: $96.1m)

(FY25: $476.7m)

+$124.6m year-on-year

improvement

-$79.1m year-on-year reduction

-$37.9m year-on-year

reduction

$79.4m

$21.1m

$17.0m

$438.8m

3. Adjusted NPAT is from continuing operations before unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure.

1514

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Review

Purpose, Ambition
and Values

Ambition

Values

Be a highly desired retail stock

Think Customer • Do Good • Own it

Purpose

To build exceptional retail brands that

customers love, our team takes pride in, and

deliver sustainable shareholder returns

1716

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Purpose, Ambition and Values

1918
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Integrated Report

Integrated

Report

Integrated Report

Welcome to The Warehouse Group’s 2026 Integrated Annual Report.

This report explains how our resources contributed to value creation in FY26 through our retail

value creation model and purpose. We describe this through six capitals: Financial Capital,

Our Store and Distribution Network, Our Brand and Customers, Human Capital, Social and

Relationship Capital, and Our Environment.

Delivering the

best products and

services in store

and online

SERVICING

CUSTOMERS

STORE DEVELOPMENT

AND OPERATIONS

RANGE AND

ASSORTMENT BUILD

SOURCE AND

PROCUREMENT

CUSTOMER

UNDERSTANDING

TRANSPORT, LOGISTICS

AND DISTRIBUTION

Property optimisation,

space and visual

merchandising

Products the

customers want at

the right price

Finding great

products from a range

of trusted suppliers

We know our

customers best

Getting products to

stores and customers

efficiently

O

u

r


C

u

l

t

u

r

e

O

u

r


S

y

s

t

e

m

s

O

u

r


P

r

o

c

e

s

s

e

s

O

u

r


B

r

a

n

d

s

C

o

m

m

u

n

i

t

i

e

s

,


S

h

a

r

e

h

o

l

d

e

r

s

C

u

s

t

o

m

e

r

s

,


T

e

a

m


M

e

m

b

e

r

s

,


S

u

p

p

l

i

e

r

s

TO BUILD

EXCEPTIONAL

RETAIL BRANDS

Financial Capital

Ensure financial resilience, free

cash flow and available liquidity to

implement strategy and provide a

sustainable return to shareholders.

Our Store and Distribution

Network

Ensure we have the right products,

at the right price, in the right place,

at the right time for our customers.

Our Brand and Customers

Build a world-class customer retail

experience, enabled by our portfolio

of brands.

Human Capital

Foster connection, inclusion &

impact; empower all team members

to thrive; and ensure everyone gets

home safe at the end of the day.

Social and Relationship

Capital

Support the communities in which

we serve and ensure the basic

human and labour rights of workers

in our supply chain are respected.

Our Environment

Improve the sustainability of our

products; provide solutions to reduce

post-consumer waste, and improve

the sustainable performance of our

operations.

InputsRetail value creation

Financial

Capital

Our Store and

Distribution

Network

Our Brand and

Customers

Human Capital

Social and

Relationship

Capital

Our

Environment

$193.5m

Operating

cash flow

(FY25: $72.3m)

217

Stores

(FY25: 216)

$1.9m

Raised for NZ

charities and

communities

77.6

NPS

(FY25: 79.7)

66%

Private label

sales with

sustainable

packaging

(FY25: 66%)

25.0pts

eNPS

(FY25: 36.0pts)

$79.4m

Free cash flow

(FY25: $(45.2)m)

21.8%

Aged inventory

(FY25: 23.1%)

7.5%

Online sales

(FY25: 7.0%)

74%

Reduction in scope

1 & 2 emissions

(market-based)

compared to FY23 base

year

0%

Median gender

pay gap

(FY25: 0%)

TRIFR (Total

Recorded Injury

Frequency Rate)

28.3

(FY25: 30.2)

(FY25: 283 tonnes)

$209.2m

Trading EBITDA

(FY25: $197.0m)

4.7x

Stock turn

(FY25: 4.6x)

492284 tonnes

Factory ethical

assessments

Of post-consumer

waste collected for

reuse or recycling

+0.4%

52-week same-

store sales

79%

Operational

waste from

landfill

(FY25: 79%)

per million hours worked

Together, these capitals underpin long-term

value for our customers, team members,

suppliers, communities and shareholders.

Materiality within our six capitals differs from

the financial materiality applied to our financial

statements. It reflects the areas that were

most important to improving, influencing or

protecting outcomes during FY26, guided by

our strategy, risk appetite and performance

objectives.

Materiality changes over time as our

circumstances, progress and priorities evolve.

This report focuses on the matters that were

most material to long-term value creation in

FY26. It is not intended to cover every aspect of

our performance, but rather the areas where

we focused our efforts to improve outcomes,

manage risks and create value for our

stakeholders.

FY26 Outcomes

2120
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Risk Management

The Group’s risk management framework has

been designed to identify, assess, control, and

monitor its key risks. The identification and

ongoing management of these key risks assists

the business in achieving its objectives.


The Group recognises four main categories of

risk:


Strategic risk – risks that could affect the

Group’s long-term direction, business model,

competitive position, or ability to deliver its

value proposition to customers.

Financial risk – risks that could affect the

Group’s financial strength, including its ability

to manage debt, liquidity, funding, market

exposures, capital investment, and other

financial obligations.

Operational risk – risks arising from the

day-to-day operation of the Group, including

people, health and safety, legal and regulatory

compliance, technology, data, cybersecurity,

business continuity, and internal processes

and controls.


Business risk – risks arising from operating

in the retail market, including changes in

customer demand, consumer behaviour,

product relevance, pricing and margin

decisions, supply chain performance, and the

effectiveness of the Group’s retail channels

and propositions.


Risk

Management

Risk management framework

Responsibility for risk management sits with

the Group’s Leadership Team, assisted by

specialised risk functions and other functional

teams within the Group.


Rapid change and increased technological

innovation within the retail sector provide

challenges for the Group to compete effectively.

To remain resilient in the Group’s constantly

evolving environment, the Leadership Team

promotes a proactive and decentralised

approach to risk management. Team members

at all levels are empowered and expected to

take ownership of risk in the work they do and

the decisions they make. This includes adhering

to Group-wide policies and procedures,

identifying emerging risks, escalating

concerns where necessary, and implementing

appropriate mitigations.


Key enterprise risks are addressed through

tailored mitigation strategies embedded across

strategic planning, financial management,

operational execution, and business processes.

These mitigation strategies may include

accepting certain risks where appropriate,

avoiding exposure where possible, reducing

risk through internal controls and process

improvements, sharing risk through

partnerships or insurance, or transferring risk

via contractual arrangements. All risk responses

are designed to align with the Group’s appetite

for risk, ensuring that risk-taking supports

long-term value creation while protecting

the interests of shareholders and other

stakeholders.


Key enterprise risks

The Group’s assessment of its key enterprise

risks has been undertaken using a Dynamic Risk

Assessment approach. In addition to evaluating

risks’ inherent and residual likelihoods and

impacts, Dynamic Risk Assessment considers

both the interconnectedness and velocity of

risks to better understand their contagion

consequences. Those factors, along with the

indicated proximity of a given risk, help the

Group prioritise responses to high-impact

active and emerging risks.


The Group’s Dynamic Risk Assessment

identified its:


Most influential risks – those enterprise risks

that have the most effect on other risks when

they occur.

Most cumulative risks – those enterprise risks

that are most affected by the occurrence of

other risks.

Most expected risk scenarios – clusters of

enterprise risks with strong links that cause

their effects to aggregate. Clusters allow other

less influential risks to have a greater effect.


The Group’s top key enterprise risks are

summarised in the adjacent table.

2322
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Risk Management

Key Enterprise Risks

RiskCategory

Inherent

Risk

Primary Mitigation Strategies

Residual

Risk

Leadership

Strategic Very High A consistent enterprise-wide leadership framework,

targeted development pathways, coaching, mentoring,

leadership assessment and talent review processes.

Medium

Business and

brand proposition

Strategic Very High Activities that connect clearly defined brand propositions

to our markets and customers, coupled with measurement

and reporting to monitor effectiveness.

Medium

Competitive

threats

Strategic Very High Market share tracking using independent card-spend data,

with sustained movements reviewed by management and

the Board and reflected in category, pricing and network

decisions.

High

Culture

Strategic High Aligned performance practices, targeted engagement and

wellbeing initiatives, and culture activation programmes

that strengthen connection, accountability and

performance outcomes.

Medium

Customer

targeting

Strategic High Defined customer segments, growth segment strategies,

and segmentation review activities that maintain

customer clarity and tactical relevance.

Medium

Socio-economic

Strategic High Ownership of a portfolio of different businesses with

different value propositions in different retail markets,

including adopting an Everyday Low Price architecture

within The Warehouse.

Medium

Profit margins

and costs

Financial Very High Margin discipline, demand-aligned inventory buying, cash

and margin monitoring, centralised cost governance, and

defined intervention triggers.

High

Process and

systems

Operational Very High A comprehensive operational governance and oversight

framework, architecture and technology standards, and

initiatives aligned with target-state architecture and

strategic objectives.

High

Talent and

capability

Operational High Strategic workforce planning, succession and talent

management, market-responsive reward and employee

value proposition strategies, and leadership, capability and

culture programmes.

High

Cybersecurity

Operational High Proactive threat detection and response, continuous

security monitoring, security awareness training, identity

and data protection, and ongoing evolution of controls

and tools to address current and emerging threats.

Medium

Health and safety

Operational High A health safety and welfare framework that includes

robust risk management practices, assurance

programmes, critical risk controls, and a centralised

approach to injury management and recovery.

Low

Product offering

BusinessVery High Dedicated buyers and planners operating within

a structured merchandise governance framework,

supported by category strategies, range reviews, supplier

oversight, and performance monitoring.

High

Supply chain and

global instability

Business Very High Multi-source strategies, structured supplier management

processes, freight contractor and lane diversification,

proactive disruption management, and network

management.

High

In-store

experience

Business High Investment in store environment enhancements, customer

experience improvements, merchandising innovation,

and store format development to improve customer

engagement, relevance and ease of shopping.

Medium

Merchandise

agility

BusinessHigh Fit for purpose merchandising processes and systems that

support timely responses to market trends and demand

changes, targeted clearance and promotional activity, and

ongoing monitoring of stock performance.

Medium

2524
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Risk Management

Our Stores and

Supply Chain

8

6

MATAMATA

BELL BLOCK

NP CENTRAL

TAURANGA

MT MAUNGANUI

FRASER COVE

THE CROSSING

PĀPĀMOA

CAMBRIDGE

TE AWAMUTU

TOKOROA

TE KUITI

ROTORUA

LEVIN

PARAPARAUMU

RANGIORA

OAMARU

ALEXANDRA

DUNEDIN

ASHBURTON

BLENHEIM

KAITĀIA

KAIKOHE

DARGAVILLE

WAIPAPA

KERIKERI

WHANGĀREI

WHAKATĀNE

WARKWORTH

GISBORNE

TAUPŌ

HASTINGS

MASTERTON

DANNEVIRKE

UPPER HUTT

INVERCARGILL

GORE

BALCLUTHA

TIMARU

QUEENSTOWN

WĀNAKA

NAPIER

HAWERA

PALMERSTON NORTH

WHANGANUI

FEILDING

NELSON

RICHMOND

GREYMOUTH

MOTUEKA

WHITIANGA

THAMES

MORRINSVILLE

CHRISTCHURCH

14

WELLINGTON

14

AUCKLAND

54

HAMILTON

12

MAP KEY

The Warehouse Store

Warehouse Stationery Store

SWAS Store

Noel Leeming Store

ONLINE STORES

Warehouse Stationery

Noel Leeming

The Warehouse

PHYSICAL STORES

84

67

66

217 stores

2 distribution centres

The Warehouse stores

Warehouse Stationery stores

including 42 SWAS

(store-within-a-store)

Noel Leeming stores

Our stores and supply chain

The Warehouse Group operates some of New

Zealand’s best-known retail brands and one

of the country’s largest retail footprints, with

217 stores across The Warehouse, Warehouse

Stationery and Noel Leeming, supported

by two large-scale distribution centres and

international sourcing hubs.

With 85% of New Zealanders within a

20-minute drive of one of our stores, our

nationwide reach is a key strength that

helps us serve customers and communities

throughout New Zealand.

Investing in store experience

and footprint

FY26 marked a return to selective investment in

the in-store experience and footprint growth.

Warehouse Stationery opened a new store in

Wellington Central during the year, increasing

its network to 67 stores. The brand expanded

further with a new store opening in Whitianga

at the beginning of FY27.

Noel Leeming opened a new store in

Palmerston North, relocating to a more

modern site. The brand announced its return to

Auckland’s Queen Street with a new concept

store format that opened in September 2026.

In March, the Group announced plans for new

The Warehouse and Noel Leeming stores in

Mangawhai, scheduled to open in late-2027.

At The Warehouse, investment focused on

improving the in-store experience. Priority

stores are receiving upgrades to lighting,

flooring and racking, alongside improvements

to visual merchandising in Home, Apparel and

Health & Beauty. These categories are a key part

of margin recovery and improving performance

at The Warehouse.

Work is underway on a future The Warehouse

flagship store concept to help shape the next

phase of store investment.

Improving supply chain

performance

Having the right product, on the right shelf, at

the right time is critical to delivering value for

customers.

As signalled at the end of the first half, the

Group is undertaking a broad programme of

work to improve cost to serve and product

availability across the supply chain.

In FY26, the Group established a dedicated

supply chain role on the Executive Leadership

Team to bring greater accountability for the

end-to-end movement of products across the

business.

During the year, the Group undertook an

independent review of inventory flow and

operating processes. The review highlighted

significant opportunities to improve supply

chain performance and several changes are

now underway.

These include changing international freight

partners to improve visibility and control

across inbound freight and simplify the flow

of containers into New Zealand. The Group is

continuing to optimise RELEX, its forecasting

and replenishment platform introduced in

FY25.

Early progress can be seen in lower

inventory levels and improved working

capital performance. However, significant

opportunities remain and improving supply

chain performance will continue to be a

priority.

International sourcing

The Warehouse Group maintains sourcing hubs

in China, Bangladesh and India, supporting

the development and supply of private-label

products across its retail brands.

These hubs work closely with suppliers on

product development, quality and production,

providing visibility across the supply chain and

supporting ethical sourcing standards. Their

local expertise helps the Group deliver quality

products, value and reliability for customers.

Global freight management

Global freight markets remained volatile

throughout the year. Higher fuel costs,

geopolitical instability and pressure across key

shipping routes created uncertainty across

international supply chains.

The Group continues to work closely with

suppliers and logistics partners as conditions

evolve, to maintain product availability and

manage disruption and cost.

Distribution Centre

2726
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Our Brands | The Warehouse

Our

Brands

For 44 years, The

Warehouse has

helped make the

desirable affordable

for all New

Zealanders.

The Warehouse recorded sales

of $1,774.9 million in FY26,

down 2.3% on FY25, which

included an additional trading

week. Sales increased 0.6% on

a comparative 52-week same-

store basis.

In FY26, economic recovery

remained slow and higher

fuel prices continued to

impact household budgets

and shopping habits. On a

comparable 52-week basis

store traffic declined slightly

by 0.3% during the year as

customers shopped with

more intention, with units sold

increasing 1.7% and basket

value increasing 0.8%.

The Warehouse’s operating

margin improved 30 basis

points for the full year, with

category gains led by Home

and Apparel. Stronger

product ranges supported

more full-price sales and less

clearance activity, reducing

the operating loss from $12.2

million in FY25 to $7.5 million

in FY26.

On a 52-week basis Apparel

returned to growth with sales

increasing 0.4%, driven by

growth in children’s essentials,

seasonal womenswear and

footwear, and men’s essentials.

Beauty gained significant

momentum at The Warehouse

in FY26, with sales increasing

5.2% as customers responded

to broader ranges and better

presentation in stores.

Toys delivered another record-

breaking year, with sales up

3.2% and units sold up 5.7%.

The Warehouse remains

New Zealand’s number one

preferred toy retailer for a

second year in a row.

Work began on a future

flagship store approach, while

selective store investment

focused on getting the basics

right, including lighting,

flooring and racking upgrades

in priority locations, alongside

improvements to visual

merchandising in Home,

Apparel and Health & Beauty.

More family fun and

experiences were brought

back into stores during the

year, from the return of

children’s shopping trolleys

and much-loved mascots The

Warehouse Kiwi and Allie the

Alien, to Santa in larger stores

at Christmas.

In-store Net Promoter Score

was 71.3, down 2.6 points from

FY25, showing there is more to

do to make The Warehouse a

more exciting and easier place

to shop.

In March, plans were

announced for a new store

in Mangawhai, opening in

late-2027. Now a fast-growing,

year-round community,

Mangawhai will become home

to the first new The Warehouse

store since Wānaka opened in

2023.

The website and app

remained important sources

of inspiration. Online sales

represented 4.4% of sales,

down from 4.6% in FY25. The

website recorded 54 million

visits and The Warehouse

app had around 440,000

downloads during the year.

In June, The Warehouse

partnered with DoorDash to

make thousands of products

available on the platform for

same-day delivery.

In FY26, focus shifted to The

Warehouse brand. A customer

segmentation review used

spending data and research to

identify opportunities to grow,

protect and regain share. Paid

media investment was paused

while channel effectiveness

was reviewed and a longer-

term brand strategy

developed, leading to the

launch of This Is Warehouse

Country at the beginning

of FY27. The new platform

celebrates The Warehouse’s

place in Kiwi life since 1982.

Community remains central to

the brand, with Red Bag sales

generating $1.35 million for

national charity partners and

local community groups.

84

Stores

Online sales

Basket valueUnits sold

FY25: 4.6%

4.4%

0.8%1.7%

Foot traffic

1

52-week same-

store sales

0.3%

0.6%

1. Foot traffic is calculated on a 52 week same-store basis

$1.8b

Sales

Down 2.3% on FY25

Operating loss

$(7.5)m

FY25: $(12.2)m

2928
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Our Brands | Warehouse Stationery

Our

Brands

For more than 30

years, Warehouse

Stationery has helped

New Zealanders

work, study, create

and connect.

FY26 marked a strong step

forward for Warehouse

Stationery, with the brand

returning to sales growth and

almost doubling operating

profit.

Warehouse Stationery

recorded sales of $227.6

million in FY26, up 0.7% on

FY25. Sales increased by 2.0%

on a comparative 52-week

same-store basis. Online

sales represented 7.1% of

Warehouse Stationery sales

in FY26, broadly in line with

FY25. Customers responded

positively to the offer, with

units sold increasing 3.4%

and average basket value

increasing 0.5%. Growth was

driven by both standalone

stores and stores operating

within The Warehouse

network.

Lower clearance and more

disciplined pricing contributed

to an operating profit

improvement of 340 basis

points compared with FY25,

making Warehouse Stationery

the Group’s strongest-

performing retail brand by

operating margin.

Margins strengthened through

the second half, contributing

to an operating profit of $15.9

million up 93.4% on FY25.

Growth was supported by

strong performances across

Warehouse Stationery’s key

categories. Print & Create

sales increased 13.8% on a

comparable 52-week basis,

Art & Craft sales increased

6.7%, and Office Furniture

sales increased 5.5%. Together,

these categories reinforce

Warehouse Stationery’s

position as a destination for

creativity, education and

business services.

The Warehouse Stationery

store network expanded

during the year. A new

standalone store opened

in central Wellington in

October, featuring self-service

print kiosks and an e-waste

recycling service.

At the beginning of FY27,

Warehouse Stationery

opened a new standalone

store in Whitianga, bringing

the brand’s full range of

products and services to the

local community and wider

Coromandel region.

Warehouse Stationery

recorded an in-store Net

Promoter Score of 85.3 in FY26.

While below the 88.8 achieved

in FY25, it remains an excellent

result and demonstrates

consistently high levels of

service across the store

network.

Connecting with local

communities is an important

part of the Warehouse

Stationery brand. Through Get

Creating New Zealand, stores

across the country hosted a

range of creative challenges

and hands-on craft activities

during the school holidays for

children and families.

Back to School is one of

Warehouse Stationery’s key

annual campaigns, engaging

schools and parents across

New Zealand and helping

them prepare for the new

school year with great value

and convenience during a

busy time.

Supporting New Zealand’s

small and medium-sized

businesses is an important

part of the Warehouse

Stationery offer. BizRewards

provides business customers

with access to exclusive offers

and benefits when shopping

with Warehouse Stationery.

67

Stores

Online sales

FY25: 7.0%

7.1 %

Foot traffic

1

0.2%

42 stores within a

The Warehouse

Basket valueUnits sold

0.5%3.4%

1. Foot traffic is calculated on a 52 week same-store basis

52-week same-

store sales

2.0%

$227.6m

Sales

Up 0.7% on FY25

Operating profit

$15.9m

FY25: $8.2m

3130
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Our Brands | Noel Leeming

For 53 years, Noel

Leeming has helped

Kiwis get the most

out of technology

and appliances.

Sales were $1,017.4 million,

down 2.0% on FY25. On a

comparable 52-week basis,

sales declined 0.2% and

same-store sales declined

0.5%. Customers purchased

fewer items during the year,

but spent more when they

did, with store traffic down

slightly by 0.5%, units sold

decreasing 3.9% and basket

value increasing 4.2%.

Operating margin improved

100 basis points during the

year, reflecting a disciplined

approach to pricing and

promotional activity. This

contributed to operating profit

increasing to $21.8 million,

up $10.1 million on FY25, and

the largest contribution from

any of the Group’s brands to

the improvement in Group

operating profit.

Appliances delivered the

strongest growth during the

year, with sales increasing

11.2% on a 52-week basis,

led by whiteware and small

appliances. Cellular sales

increased 4.7% and computers

and storage increased 10.6%,

supported by new brands

and customer demand linked

to the Windows 10 and 3G

transitions. Services, including

delivery, installation and Tech

Solutions, grew 10.1% during

the year.

Major campaigns including

Black Friday and Christmas

performed well, while Boxing

Day was softer, in line with

broader retail conditions. The

brand continued to build

personality and engagement

through its marketing, helping

grow Noel Leeming’s digital

channels, with online sales

increasing to 13.1% of sales, up

from 11.3% in FY25. The website

recorded 118.8 million visits up

from 38 million in FY25, and

the Noel Leeming app had

86,600 downloads during the

year compared to 47,800 in

FY25.

Noel Leeming continued to

invest in its store network and

customer experience. The

brand relocated its Palmerston

North store to more modern

site. Fixtures and materials

from the previous store

were reused, and e-waste

and mobile phone recycling

services were introduced for

the local community. Plans

were announced for a new

store in Mangawhai, opening

in late-2027 to serve the

growing community there.

In May 2026, Noel Leeming

announced its return to

Queen Street in Auckland.

Opening in September 2026,

the new concept store offers

demonstrations, events,

product launches and

hands-on experiences.

Expert advice and service

remain at the heart of the Noel

Leeming customer experience.

Team members strengthened

their product and service

knowledge through NOELedge

Academies, supplier training

and the Passionate Promoters

programme, helping Noel

Leeming maintain a solid

in-store Net Promoter Score

of 76.1 in FY26, compared with

76.9 in FY25.

Noel Leeming helps customers

extend the life of technology

and appliances through

trade-in and recycling

programmes. Customers can

trade in eligible smartphones,

laptops, tablets and

smartwatches in exchange for

a Noel Leeming gift card, and

can now purchase refurbished

devices.

Through its partnership

with TechCollect NZ, Noel

Leeming offers e-waste

recycling. Customers recycled

approximately 169 tonnes

of e-waste through the

programme during FY26, with

Hastings, Gore and Porirua

joining the network and

increasing the number of

participating stores from 29

to 32.

Our

Brands

66

Stores

Online sales

FY25: 11.3%

13.1%

Basket valueUnits sold

4.2%3.9%

Foot traffic

1

0.5%

1. Foot traffic is calculated on a 52 week same-store basis

52-week same-

store sales

0.5%

$1.02b

Sales

Down 2.0% on a

53-week FY25

Operating profit

$21.8m

FY25: $11.7m

32
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026

Consolidated Income Statement 34

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income 34

Consolidated Balance Sheet 35

Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows 36

Reconciliation of Operating Cash Flows 36

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity 37

1.1 Reporting entity 38

1.2 Compliance statement 38

1.3 Basis of preparation 38

1.4 Changes in accounting policy information and interpretations 38

1.5 Reporting period 38

1.6 Material accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions 38

1.7 Non-GAAP financial information 38

2.0 Segment Information 39

2.1 Operating performance 39

2.2 Adjustment for NZ IFRS 16 (Leases) 39

3.0 Income and Expenses 40

3.1 Other income 40

3.2 Employee expense 40

3.3 Depreciation and amortisation expense 40

3.4 Other operating expense 40

3.5 Auditors’ fees 40

3.6 Net other interest expense 40

4.0 Taxation 41

4.1 Taxation - income statement 41

4.2 Taxation - balance sheet current taxation asset 41

4.3 Taxation - balance sheet deferred taxation 41

5.0 Adjusted Net Profit 42

6.0 Earnings Per Share 42

7.0 Dividends 42

8.0 Working Capital 43

8.1 Inventory 43

8.2 Trade and other receivables 43

8.3 Trade and other payables 43

8.4 Provisions 44

9.0 Non Current Assets 44

9.1 Property, plant and equipment 44

9.2 Intangible assets 45

10.0 Lease Liabilities and Right of Use Assets 46

10.1 Rights of use assets 46

10.2 Lease liabilities 46

10.3 Lease liability maturity analysis 46

11.0 Equity 47

11.1 Capital management 47

11.2 Bank and debt facilities 47

11.3 Contributed equity 47

11.4 Reserves 47

11.5 Minority interest 48

12.0 Financial Risk Management 49

12.1 Financial risk factors 49

12.2 Derivative financial instruments 49

12.3 Liquidity risk 50

12.4 Credit risk 50

12.5 Market risk 50

13.0 Key Management 51

14.0 Commitments 51

15.0 Contingent Liabilities 51

16.0 Related Parties 51

Contents

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS PageOPERATING ASSETS AND LIABILITIES Page

FINANCING AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE

FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT

OTHER DISCLOSURES

BASIS OF PREPARATION

FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE

Financial

Statements

Financial Statements

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

The financial statements have been presented in a style which makes them less complex and more relevant to shareholders. The note disclosures have been grouped

into six sections: ‘basis of preparation’, ‘financial performance’, ‘operating assets and liabilities’, ‘financing and capital structure’, ‘financial risk management’ and ‘other

disclosures’. Each section sets out the material accounting policy information in grey text boxes applied in producing the relevant notes, along with details of any key

judgements and estimates used. The purpose of this format is to provide readers with a clearer understanding of what drives financial performance of the Group.

These financial statements have been approved for issue by the Board of Directors on 29 September 2026.

The Warehouse Group Limited is a limited liability company incorporated and domiciled in New Zealand.

The address of its registered office is 26 The Warehouse Way, Northcote, Auckland 0627, New Zealand.

John Journee

Board Chair

29 September 2026

Dean Hamilton

Audit and Risk Committee Chair

29 September 2026

33

Financial Statements

Consolidated Income Statement
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

Note20262025

$ 000$ 000

Retail sales

2.1

3,027,587 3,086,725

Cost of retail goods sold

8.1

(2,041,000)(2,091,643)

Gross profit

986,587

995,082

Other income

3.1

14,680 14,314

Employee expense

3.2

(519,641)(526,520)

Depreciation and amortisation expense

3.3

(146,896)(156,524)

Other operating expense

3.4

(272,421)(285,836)

Operating profit

2.1

62,309 40,516

Unusual items

5.0

(5,716)-

Earnings before interest and tax

56,593 40,516

Interest on leases

10.2

(36,945)(36,847)

Net other interest expense

3.6

(2,659)(6,668)

Profit/(loss) before tax

16,989 (2,999)

Income tax benefit/(expense)

4.1

(5,463)572

Net profit/(loss) for the period

11,526 (2,427)

Attributable to:

Shareholders of the parent

11,234 (2,764)

Minority interests

11.5

292 337

11,526 (2,427)

Basic and diluted earnings per share attributable to shareholders of the parent

6.0

3.3 cents (0.8) cents

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

Note20262025

$ 000$ 000

Net profit/(loss) for the period

11,526 (2,427)

Items that may be reclassified subsequently to the income statement

Movement in foreign currency translation reserve

265 -

Movement in derivative cash flow hedges

1,641 (10,301)

Tax relating to movement in hedge reserve

(459)2,884

Other comprehensive income/(loss)

1,447 (7,417)

Total comprehensive income/(loss)

12,973 (9,844)

Attributable to:

Shareholders of the parent

12,681 (10,181)

Minority interest11.5

292 337

Total comprehensive income/(loss)

12,973 (9,844)

Consolidated Balance Sheet

As at 2 August 2026

Note20262025

$ 000$ 000

ASSETS

Current assets

Cash and cash equivalents

11.2

41,883 39,206

Trade and other receivables

8.2

77,505 69,871

Inventory

8.1

438,819 476,718

Derivative financial instruments

12.2

2,618 3,908

Current taxation

4.2

2,329 2,473

Total current assets

563,154 592,176

Non current assets

Trade and other receivables

8.2

17,754 22,088

Property, plant and equipment

9.1

135,286 155,078

Intangible assets

9.2

119,605 140,090

Right of use assets

10.1

583,551 590,187

Deferred taxation

4.3

89,020 94,278

Total non current assets

945,216 1,001,721

Total assets

1,508,370 1,593,897

LIABILITIES

Current liabilities

Borrowings

11.2

58,900 135,300

Trade and other payables

8.3

362,362 376,758

Derivative financial instruments

12.2

2,672 3,768

Lease liabilities

10.3

97,485 92,522

Provisions

8.4

45,707 42,926

Total current liabilities

567,126 651,274

Non current liabilities

Lease liabilities

10.3

607,843 621,317

Provisions

8.4

20,260 20,810

Total non current liabilities

628,103 642,127

Total liabilities

1,195,229 1,293,401

Net assets

313,141 300,496

EQUITY

Contributed equity

11.3

360,235 360,235

Reserves

11.4

611 (836)

Retained earnings

(48,795)(60,029)

Total equity attributable to shareholders

312,051 299,370

Minority interest

11.5

1,090 1,126

Total equity

313,141 300,496

3534

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements

Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

Note20262025

$ 000$ 000

Cash flows from operating activities

Cash received from customers

3,039,467 3,099,203

Payments to suppliers and employees

(2,805,717)(2,982,438)

Income tax paid

4.2

(532)(692)

Interest paid

(39,705)(43,750)

Net cash flows from operating activities

193,513 72,323

Cash flows from investing activities

Proceeds from sale of property, plant & equipment

43 160

Purchase of property, plant & equipment and computer software

(19,446)(12,604)

Net cash flows from investing activities

(19,403)(12,444)

Cash flows from financing activities

Proceeds/(repayments) from borrowings

(76,400)52,400

Lease principal repayments

(94,705)(104,882)

Dividends paid to minority shareholders

(328)(395)

Net cash flows from financing activities

(171,433)(52,877)

Net cash inflow

2,677 7,002

Opening cash position

39,206 32,204

Closing cash position

11.2

41,883 39,206

Reconciliation of Operating Cash Flows

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

Note20262025

$ 000$ 000

Net profit/(loss) for the period

11,526 (2,427)

Non cash items

Depreciation and amortisation expense

3.3

146,896 156,524

Work in progress written off

4,973 -

Movement in deferred taxation

4.1

4,795 (1,570)

Total non cash items

156,664 154,954

4.1

Items classified as investing or financing activities

Loss on disposal/impairment of plant, equipment and software

2,272 187

Gain on lease terminations

2.2

(12)-

Total investing and financing adjustments

2,260 187

Changes in assets and liabilities

Trade and other receivables

(3,300)7,263

Inventory

37,899 (4,590)

Trade and other payables

(13,911)(84,211)

Provisions

2,231 841

Current tax

144 306

Total changes in assets and liabilities

23,063 (80,391)

Net cash flows from operating activities

193,513 72,323

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

Note

Share

Capital

Treasury

Shares

Hedge

Reserves

Foreign

Currency

Translation

Reserve

Retained

Earnings

Minority

Interest

Total

Equity

$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

Balance at the beginning of the period

365,517 (5,282)(1,056)220 (60,029)1,126 300,496

Profit for the period

- - - - 11,234 292 11,526

Movement in foreign currency translation reserve

- - - 265 - - 265

Movement in derivative cash flow hedges

- - 1,641- - - 1,641

Tax relating to movement in hedge reserve

- - (459)- - - (459)

Total comprehensive income

- - 1,182 265 11,234 292 12,973

Contributions by and distributions to owners

Dividends paid

11.5

- - - - - (328)(328)

Balance at the end of the period

365,517 (5,282)126 485 (48,795)1,090 313,141

(note: 11.3)(note: 11.3)(note: 11.4)(note: 11.4)(note: 11.5)

For the 53 week period ended 3 August 2025

Balance at the beginning of the period

365,517 (5,282)6,361 220 (57,265)1,184 310,735

Profit/(loss) for the period

- - - - (2,764)337 (2,427)

Movement in foreign currency translation reserve

- - - - - - -

Movement in derivative cash flow hedges

- - (10,301)- - - (10,301)

Tax relating to movement in hedge reserve

- - 2,884 - - - 2,884

Total comprehensive income/(loss)

- - (7,417)- (2,764)337 (9,844)

Contributions by and distributions to owners

Dividends paid

11.5

- - - - - (395)(395)

Balance at the end of the period

365,517 (5,282)(1,056)220 (60,029)1,126 300,496

(note: 11.3) (note: 11.3) (note: 11.4) (note: 11.4) (note: 11.5)

3736

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements

Notes to the Financial Statements - Basis of Preparation
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

1.0 BASIS OF PREPARATION

1.1 Reporting entity

The Warehouse Group Limited (the Company) and its subsidiaries (together

the Group) operate in the New Zealand retail sector. The Company is a limited

liability company incorporated and domiciled in New Zealand. The Group is

registered under the Companies Act 1993 and is an FMC reporting entity under

Part 7 of the Financial Markets Conduct Act 2013. The address of the Company’s

registered office is 26 The Warehouse Way, Northcote, Auckland 0627, New

Zealand. The Company is listed on the New Zealand Exchange (NZX).

1.2 Compliance statement

These financial statements have been prepared in accordance with New Zealand

Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (NZ GAAP), the Financial Markets

Conduct Act 2013 and the NZX Listing Rules. They comply with New Zealand

Equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards (NZ IFRS), other

applicable Financial Reporting Standards and authoritative pronouncements of

the External Reporting Board, as appropriate for for-profit entities. The financial

statements also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards

Accounting Standards (IFRS Accounting Standards) issued by the International

Accounting Standards Board (IASB).

1.3 Basis of preparation

The measurement basis adopted in the preparation of these financial

statements is historical cost, as modified by the remeasurement of certain

assets and liabilities at fair value. The financial statements are presented in New

Zealand dollars and all amounts are rounded to the nearest thousand dollars,

unless otherwise stated.

Material accounting policy information and other explanatory information

applied in the preparation of these financial statements are set out in the

accompanying notes where an accounting policy choice exists under NZ IFRS,

where the policy is new or has changed, where the policy is specific to the

Group’s operations, or where the information is considered material to an

understanding of the financial statements. Where NZ IFRS does not permit

an accounting policy choice, the Group has applied the requirements of the

relevant standards and has not separately disclosed the accounting policy.

The consolidated financial statements comprise the financial statements of the

Company and its subsidiaries. Material subsidiaries at balance date are listed

below.

Percentage ownership

Name of entityPrincipal activity2026 2025

The Warehouse LimitedRetail100 100

Eldamos Investments LimitedProperty100 100

The Warehouse Nominees

Limited

Investment100 100

Group structure

There were no changes to the Group’s legal structure during 2026. Subsequent

to balance date, the Group commenced the process of liquidating TWHouse

Sourcing Private Limited in India following the cessation of its sourcing

operations as part of the Group restructuring programme (refer note 5). The

liquidation is not expected to have a material impact on the Group’s financial

position or performance.

1.4 Changes in accounting policy information and

interpretations

There were no new accounting standards, amendments or interpretations that

became effective for the Group during 2026 that had a material impact on the

Group’s accounting policies, recognition, measurement, financial position or

financial performance.

The Group has not early adopted any standards, amendments or interpretations

that have been issued but are not yet effective.

In May 2024, the IASB issued NZ IFRS 18 Presentation and Disclosure in Financial

Statements, which replaces NZ IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements. NZ

IFRS 18 is effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January

2027 and will therefore be mandatory for the Group from 2028. The standard

introduces new presentation and disclosure requirements for the primary

financial statements and management-defined performance measures. The

Group is currently assessing the impact of the standard and does not currently

expect a material impact on the recognition or measurement of assets, liabilities,

income or expenses.

Climate change

The Group considered the potential financial statement impacts of climate-

related risks and opportunities as part of the preparation of its sustainability

reporting. This assessment included consideration of whether climate-

related matters affected key accounting estimates and judgements, including

impairment testing, useful economic lives of assets, provisions, asset valuations

and the recoverability of assets.

Based on the assessment performed, the Group concluded that climate-related

matters did not have a material impact on the recognition or measurement

of assets and liabilities at balance date, nor did they result in any material

adjustments to the judgements, estimates and assumptions used in preparing

the financial statements. Accordingly, no climate-related matters were

identified that required specific disclosure beyond those included in the Group’s

Sustainability Report.

1.5 Reporting period

These financial statements cover the 52 week period from 4 August 2025 to

2 August 2026. Comparative information relates to the 53 week period from

29 July 2024 to 3 August 2025. The Group operates on a weekly reporting cycle,

resulting in a 53 week reporting period approximately every five to six years.

1.6 Material accounting judgements, estimates and

assumptions

The preparation of the financial statements requires the Group to make

judgements, estimates and assumptions that effect the reported amounts of

assets and liabilities at balance date and the reported amounts of revenues and

expenses during the year. Judgements and estimates which are material to the

financial statements are found in the following notes:

(a) Lease liabilities and right of use assets (notes 10.1 and 10.2)

(b) Inventory (note 8.1)

(c) Property, plant and equipment (note 9.1)

(d) Intangible assets and tax losses (note 9.2)

1.7 Non-GAAP financial information

The Group uses operating profit, EBIT, unusual items and adjusted net profit to

describe financial performance, as these measures provide useful information

on the underlying performance of the business. These non-GAAP measures

are not defined by NZ IFRS and may not be comparable with similarly titled

measures reported by other entities. The Group’s policies for unusual items and

adjusted net profit are set out in note 5.0.

Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Performance

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

2.0 SEGMENT INFORMATION

(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

2.1 Operating performance

Retail salesOperating profit/(loss)Retail operating margin

Note202620252026202520262025

$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000

The Warehouse

1,774,873 1,816,475 (7,529)(12,247)-0.4% -0.7%

Warehouse Stationery

227,630 226,036 15,903 8,217 7.0% 3.6%

Warehouse segment

2,002,503 2,042,511 8,374 (4,030)0.4% -0.2%

Noel Leeming

1,017,353 1,038,058 21,758 11,667 2.1% 1.1%

Other Group operations

12,464 11,578 (7,567)(6,326)

Inter-segment eliminations

(4,733)(5,422)- -

Group

3,027,587 3,086,725 22,565 1,311 0.7% 0.0%

Adjustments for NZ IFRS 16 (Leases)

2.2

39,744 39,205

Operating profit

62,309 40,516

Unusual items

5.0

(5,716)-

Earnings before interest and tax

56,593 40,516

Retail sales

Retail sales are recognised when the customer receives the goods which typically occurs at the point of sale for instore sales, or where the goods are purchased

online, when the goods have been delivered to the customer. Revenue from the sale of goods is recognised at the amount of the transaction price when all

performance obligations have been met and the customer obtains control of the goods.

Operating segments

The Group has three retail brands trading in the New Zealand retail sector. These brands form the basis of internal reporting used by senior management and the

Board of Directors to monitor and assess performance and assist with strategy decisions. Brand trading performance is assessed using operating profit, which is a

non-GAAP measure that excludes the impacts of NZ IFRS 16 Leases, and is considered a better measure of underlying brand performance. Assets are not allocated to

operating segments and the balance sheet is managed and internally reported on a consolidated basis to the senior management and the Board of Directors.

Customers can purchase products from the three main retail chains either online or through the Group’s physical retail store network. At year end the Group’s

physical store network consists of 84 The Warehouse stores, 67 Warehouse Stationery stores (including 42 stores trading within The Warehouse stores), and 66

Noel Leeming stores. The Warehouse predominantly sells general merchandise and apparel, Noel Leeming sells technology and appliance products and Warehouse

Stationery sells stationery products.

Other Group operations include a property company, a chocolate factory and the residual cost of unallocated support office functions.

(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

2.2 Adjustment for NZ IFRS 16 (Leases)

Note20262025

$ 000$ 000

Pre NZ IFRS 16 lease expense

132,580 132,538

Right of use asset amortisation

10.1

(92,848)(93,333)

Gain on lease terminations

12 -

Impact on operating profit

2.1

39,744 39,205

Lease liability interest

10.2

(36,945)(36,847)

Impact on net profit before tax

5.0

2,799 2,358

3938

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements

3.0 INCOME AND EXPENSES
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

3.1 Other income

20262025

$ 000$ 000

Tenancy rents received

2,079 2,328

Retail media

9,133 8,702

Other

3,468 3,284

Other income

14,680 14,314

(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

3.2 Employee expense

Note20262025

$ 000$ 000

Wages and salaries

509,112 522,103

Directors' fees

13.0

767 772

Performance based compensation

9,762 3,645

Employee expense

519,641 526,520

(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

3.3 Depreciation and amortisation expense

Note20262025

$ 000$ 000

Property, plant and equipment

9.1

32,826 40,325

Computer software

9.2

21,222 22,866

Right of use assets

10.1

92,848 93,333

Depreciation and amortisation expense

146,896 156,524

(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

3.4 Other operating expense

20262025

$ 000$ 000

Other operating expenses include:

Bad debt and movement in provision for doubtful debts expense

1,155 (304)

Loss on disposal/impairment of plant, equipment and software

2,272 187

Net foreign currency exchange loss/(profit)

(3)273

(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

3.5 Auditors’ fees

20262025

$ 000$ 000

Audit and review of the financial statements

Auditing the Group financial statements

810 803

Reviewing the half year financial statements

180 118

Audit of overseas subsidiary financial statements

18 19

1,008 940

Other agreed-upon procedure engagements

Annual shareholder meeting voting

12 10

Negative Pledge compliance certificate

12 12

24 22

Total fees paid to PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC)

1,032 962

All fees are paid to PwC New Zealand, with the exception of $18,000 (2025: $19,000) paid to PwC India for the audit of the Group’s subsidiary in India.

Audit fees - corporate governance

In accordance with the Group’s policies regarding audit governance and independence, other non-audit services are approved by the Group’s Audit and

Risk Committee. The Group’s policy permits the audit firm to provide non-audit services that are not considered to be in conflict with the preservation of the

independence of the auditor, subject to Audit and Risk Committee approval.

(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

3.6 Net other interest expense

20262025

$ 000$ 000

Interest on deposits and use of money interest received

(142)(319)

Interest on borrowings

2,801 6,987

Net other interest expense

2,659 6,668

4.0 TAXATION

A reconciliation between the tax expense recognised in the income statement and tax expense calculated per the statutory income tax rate is detailed below.

(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

4.1 Taxation - income statement

Note20262025

$ 000$ 000

Profit/(loss) before tax

16,989 (2,999)

Taxation calculated at 28%

4,757 (840)

Adjusted for the tax effect of:

Other non deductible expenditure

603 230

Income tax under provided in prior year

103 38

Income tax (benefit)/expense

5,463 (572)

Income tax (benefit)/expense comprises:

Current year income tax payable

4.2

668 998

Deferred taxation

4.3

4,795 (1,570)

Income tax (benefit)/expense

5,463 (572)

Income taxation

The income tax expense for the period is the tax payable on the current year’s taxable income based on the income tax rate adjusted by changes in deferred tax

assets and liabilities attributable to temporary differences between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the financial statements.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised for temporary differences at the tax rates expected to apply when the assets are recovered or liabilities are

settled, based on those tax rates which are enacted or substantively enacted. The relevant tax rates are applied to the cumulative amounts of deductible and

taxable temporary differences to measure the deferred tax asset or liability.

Deferred tax assets are recognised for deductible temporary differences and unused tax losses only if it is probable that future taxable amounts will be available

to utilise those temporary differences and losses. Deferred tax liabilities and assets are not recognised for temporary differences between the carrying amount

and tax bases of investments in subsidiaries and associates where the parent entity is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and

it is probable that the differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

Current and deferred tax balances attributable to amounts recognised in equity are similarly recognised in equity.

Goods and services tax (GST)

The income statement and statement of cash flows have been prepared so that all components are stated exclusive of GST. All items in the balance sheet are

stated net of GST with the exception of receivables and payables which include GST invoiced.

Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development’s Pillar Two

The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) has introduced GloBE Pillar Two model rules which aim to implement a minimum global tax

rate of 15 per cent across all jurisdictions.

The New Zealand Government has enacted legislation to implement the OECD Pillar Two Rules which are effective for the Group from August 2025. The Group also

operates in other countries which apply the Pillar Two Rules with effect for the Group from August 2024. The Group has applied the exception to recognising and

disclosing information about deferred tax assets and liabilities related to Pillar Two income taxes.

The Group has undertaken a high-level assessment to determine the Group’s potential exposure to Pillar Two top-up taxes. Based on the assessment, it is expected

that the Group will satisfy the relevant criteria to rely on the Pillar Two transitional safe harbour rules and is not expected to have exposure to Pillar Two top up

taxes. The Group is continuing to monitor the developments of the Pillar Two legislation in countries that the Group operates in and assess the impact of Pillar Two

legislation on its future financial performance.

The following table details the movement in the current income tax asset during the current and prior year.

4.2 Taxation - balance sheet current taxation asset

Note20262025

$ 000$ 000

Opening balance

2,473 2,779

Foreign exchange movement

(8)-

Current year income tax payable

4.1

(668)(998)

Income tax paid

532 692

Closing balance

2,329 2,473

4.3 Taxation - balance sheet

deferred taxation

Opening Balance

Credited/(expensed) to the

income statement

Credited/(expensed) to

equityClosing Balance

Note20262025202620252026202520262025

$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000

Lease liabilities

201,979 205,838 (2,643)(3,859)- - 199,336 201,979

Inventory

10,494 10,967 2,042 (473)- - 12,536 10,494

Property, plant, equipment & software

2,774 6,873 1,806 (4,099)- - 4,580 2,774

Employee provisions

13,842 14,074 (499)(232)- - 13,343 13,842

Tax losses

9.2

34,617 25,349 (7,534)9,268 - - 27,083 34,617

Derivatives

411 - - - (411)411 - 411

Other

5,357 6,327 853 (970)(4)- 6,206 5,357

Gross deferred tax asset

269,474 269,428 (5,975)(365)(415)411 263,084 269,474

Right of use assets

(165,252)(168,451)1,858 3,199 - - (163,394)(165,252)

Brand

(4,340)(4,340)- - - - (4,340)(4,340)

Derivatives

- (2,473)- - (48)2,473 (48)-

Other

(5,604)(4,340)(678)(1,264)- - (6,282)(5,604)

Gross deferred tax liability

(175,196)(179,604)1,180 1,935 (48)2,473 (174,064)(175,196)

Net deferred tax asset

94,278 89,824 (4,795)1,570 (463)2,884 89,020 94,278

(note: 4.1) (note: 4.1)

Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Performance

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Performance

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

4140

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements

5.0 ADJUSTED NET PROFIT
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

Adjusted net profit reconciliationNote20262025

$ 000$ 000

Net profit/(loss) attributable to shareholders of the parent

11,234 (2,764)

Add back:

Unusual items: Restructure costs

5,716 -

Adjustments for NZ IFRS 16 (Leases)

2.2

(2,799)(2,358)

Income tax relating to above items

(620)660

Adjusted net profit/(loss)

13,531 (4,462)

Certain transactions can make the comparison of profits between years difficult. The Group uses adjusted net profit as a key indicator of performance and

considers it a better measure of underlying business performance. Adjusted net profit makes allowance for the after tax effect of unusual items which are not

directly connected with the Group’s normal trading activities. The Group defines unusual items as any gains or losses from property disposals, goodwill and brand

impairment, costs relating to business acquisitions or disposals, ineffective hedge derivatives and costs connected with restructuring the Group. Following the

adoption of NZ IFRS 16 the non-cash impact relating to the lease accounting standard is also excluded from adjusted net profit.

Restructure costs

In November 2025, the Group commenced a cost reset programme aimed at improving profitability and reducing operating costs. Restructure costs comprise head

office redundancy costs associated with the co-sourcing of selected corporate and administrative functions with Tata Consultancy Services, as well as the closure of

TWHouse Sourcing Private Limited, the Group’s Indian subsidiary.

6.0 EARNINGS PER SHARE

(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)

Earnings per share calculationNote20262025

Net profit/(loss) attributable to shareholders of the parent ($000s)

11,234 (2,764)

Adjusted net profit/(loss) ($000s)

5.0

13,531 (4,462)

Basic and diluted

Weighted average number of ordinary shares (net of treasury shares) on issue (000s)

345,354 345,354

Earnings per share (cents)

3.3 (0.8)

Adjusted earnings per share (cents)

3.9 (1.3)

Earnings per share (EPS) is the amount of post tax profit attributable to each share. Basic EPS is calculated by dividing net profit attributable to shareholders by

the weighted average number of ordinary shares (net of treasury shares) outstanding during the year. Adjusted basic EPS is similarly calculated using adjusted net

profit as the numerator.

The Group did not hold any potentially dilutive share rights throughout the current financial year or at balance date last year.

7.0 DIVIDENDS

Dividend policy

The Group declares two dividends in a typical year, the first in respect of the half year (interim dividend) and second in respect of the full year result (final dividend).

Dividends are declared at the discretion of the Board and subject to trading performance, market conditions and liquidity requirements. The Group’s dividend policy

is to distribute at least 70% of the Group’s full year adjusted net profit. Notwithstanding the Group’s adjusted net profit of $13.5 million (refer note 5.0), the Board did

not declare a final dividend for 2026. While the performance improved during the year, the Board determined that retaining capital to support the Group’s financial

recovery and strategic investment priorities was appropriate in the circumstances.

Imputation credit account20262025

$ 000$ 000

Imputation credits at balance date available for future distribution

107,856 107,729

Notes to the Financial Statements - Operating Assets and Liabilities

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

8.0 WORKING CAPITAL

8.1 Inventory

20262025

$ 000$ 000

Finished goods

397,891 412,409

Inventory provisions

(18,883)(15,210)

Retail stock

379,008 397,199

Goods in transit from overseas

59,811 79,519

Inventory

438,819 476,718

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is calculated using a weighted average method and includes expenditure incurred

to purchase the inventory and transport it to its current location. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price of the inventory in the ordinary course of

business less costs necessary to make the sale. The cost of inventories consumed during the period are recognised as an expense and included in cost of goods

sold in the income statement.

Material accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions

Assessing provisions for inventory obsolescence, net realisable value and shrinkage involves making estimates and judgements in relation to future selling prices

and expected shrinkage rates between the most recent store stock counts and balance date. Shrinkage is a reduction in inventory due to shoplifting, employee theft,

record keeping errors and supplier fraud. The Group considers a wide range of factors including historical data, current trends and product information from buyers

as part of the process to determine the appropriate value of these provisions.

Goods in transit from overseas

Goods in transit are recognised when control of the goods passes to the Group. Control is determined based on the Group’s substantive rights over the inventory,

including its ability to direct the use and movement of the goods and obtain the associated economic benefits.

8.2 Trade and other receivables

20262025

$ 000$ 000

Trade receivables

34,207 29,512

Prepayments

39,618 39,760

Rebate accruals and other debtors

21,434 22,687

Trade and other receivables

95,259 91,959

Less non current prepayments

(17,754)(22,088)

Current trade and other receivables

77,505 69,871

Trade receivables arise from sales made to customers on credit or through the collection of rebates from suppliers not otherwise deducted from suppliers’

payable accounts. Trade receivables are non-interest bearing and are generally on 30 to 60 day terms. Trade receivables are recognised based on the value of

the invoice sent to the customer and adjusted for expected credit losses to provide for future unrecovered debts. The expected collectability of trade and other

receivables is reviewed on an ongoing basis.

8.3 Trade and other payables

20262025

$ 000$ 000

Local trade creditors and accruals

205,475 224,514

Foreign currency trade creditors

71,588 75,223

Goods in transit creditors

33,378 35,236

Capital expenditure creditors

2,629 1,028

Goods and services tax

26,815 17,404

Reward schemes and gift vouchers

13,572 13,589

Payroll accruals

8,905 9,764

Trade and other payables

362,362 376,758

Trade payables represent liabilities for goods and services provided to the Group prior to the end of financial year which are unpaid. The amounts are normally

unsecured and local creditors are typically settled within 60 days and foreign creditors up to 120 days of recognition. Due to the short term nature of these

payables, the carrying value approximates their fair value.

Foreign currency trade creditors

The Group has a supplier financing arrangement for foreign currency trade creditors with one of its banks. The Group provides the bank and the supplier with

visibility of invoices it has approved for payment, which allows suppliers choosing to enter the financing arrangement to factor selected invoices and accelerate

settlement from the bank before the invoice due date. The Group is not party to the financing leg of the arrangement and are not aware of the exact terms and

conditions negotiated between the bank and our suppliers. The payment terms of the Group’s foreign currency trade creditors do not exceed 120 days from the

invoice date and invoice payment terms (including security) do not vary between those where suppliers have factored their receivables from those who have not.

The Group classifies the amounts factored by suppliers as foreign currency trade creditors because the characteristics of the amounts payable by the Group are

the same as its other foreign currency trade creditors. At balance date $58.5 million (2025: $64.0 million) of foreign currency trade creditors were part of a supplier

financing arrangement.

Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Performance

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

4342

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements

8.4 Provisions
CurrentNon currentTotal

202620252026202520262025

$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000

Employee entitlements

40,474 38,274 13,783 14,252 54,257 52,526

Make good provision

1,465 937 6,477 6,558 7,942 7,495

Sales return provision

3,768 3,715 - - 3,768 3,715

Provisions

45,707 42,926 20,260 20,810 65,967 63,736

A provision is recognised if, as a result of a past event, the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation that can be estimated reliably, and it is probable

that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation.

Employee entitlements

(i) Annual leave and sick leave

Liabilities for annual leave and accumulating sick leave expected to be settled within 12 months of the reporting date are recognised in provisions in

respect of employees’ services up to the reporting date and are measured at the amounts expected to be paid when the liabilities are settled. Liabilities for

non-accumulating sick leave are recognised when the leave is taken and measured at the rates paid or payable.

(ii) Performance based compensation

The Group recognises a liability and expense for incentives payable to employees where either a contractual or constructive obligation arises to pay an employee

based on achieving an agreed level of individual and company performance.

(iii) Long service leave

The liability for long service leave is recognised in the provision for employee benefits and measured as the present value of expected future payments to be

made in respect of services provided by employees up to the reporting date. Consideration is given to expected future wage and salary levels, experience of

employee departures and periods of service. Expected future payments are discounted using market yields at the reporting date on New Zealand government

bonds with terms to maturity that match, as closely as possible, the estimated future cash outflows.

Make good provision

The Group has an obligation to restore certain leasehold sites to their original condition when the lease expires. This provision represents the present value of the

expected future make good commitment. Amounts charged to the provision represent both make good costs incurred and costs incurred which mitigate the final

liability prior to the lease expiry.

Sales return provision

The Group provides various guarantees and warranties to replace, repair or refund customers for faulty or defective products sold. This provision represents the

estimated sales return obligation at balance date based on historical sales return rates.

9.0 NON CURRENT ASSETS

9.1 Property, plant and

equipment

Land and buildingsPlant and equipmentWork in progressTotal

Note20262025202620252026202520262025

$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000

Cost

60,590 60,590 695,211 716,526 9,567 11,278 765,368 788,394

Accumulated depreciation

(13,214)(12,780)(597,076)(588,406)- - (610,290)(601,186)

Opening carrying amount

47,376 47,810 98,135 128,120 9,567 11,278 155,078 187,208

Additions

- - 15,768 10,150 3,144 (1,711)18,912 8,439

Disposals, write offs & impairment

- - (905)(244)(4,973)- (5,878)(244)

Depreciation

3.3

(403)(434)(32,423)(39,891)- - (32,826)(40,325)

Closing carrying amount

46,973 47,376 80,575 98,135 7,738 9,567 135,286 155,078

Cost

60,590 60,590 701,144 695,211 7,738 9,567 769,472 765,368

Impairment & accumulated depreciation

(13,617)(13,214)(620,569)(597,076)- - (634,186)(610,290)

Closing carrying amount

46,973 47,376 80,575 98,135 7,738 9,567 135,286 155,078

Property, plant and equipment are measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. The cost of purchased property, plant and equipment

is the value of the consideration given to acquire the assets inclusive of directly attributable costs incurred to bring the assets to the location and condition

necessary for their intended use.

Property, plant and equipment are depreciated on a straight line basis to allocate the cost, less any residual value, over their useful life. The estimated useful lives

of property, plant and equipment are as follows:

Freehold land indefinite

Freehold buildings 50 - 100 years

Plant and equipment 3 - 15 years

Work in progress not depreciated

The Group annually reviews the carrying amounts of property, plant and equipment for impairment. An asset’s carrying amount is written down immediately to

its recoverable amount if the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its estimated recoverable amount. In assessing whether an asset is impaired, reference is

made to individual store profitability and any other known events or circumstances that may indicate that the carrying amount of an asset may be impaired.

Gains and losses on disposals of assets are determined by comparing proceeds with the carrying amount. These gains and losses are included in the income

statement. Costs incurred on repairs and maintenance are charged to the income statement during the financial period in which they are incurred.

Material accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions

The Group assesses store assets, software (refer note 9.2) and store development work in progress for indicators of impairment and, where indicators exist,

estimates their recoverable amount. This assessment requires judgement in assessing the future economic benefits expected to be derived from the assets,

including expected store performance, future utilisation and alternative deployment opportunities. Where assets are no longer expected to generate sufficient future

economic benefits, the recoverable amount is based on the most appropriate measure of value, including disposal or scrap value where applicable.

9.2 Intangible assets

GoodwillBrand namesComputer softwareTotal

Note20262025202620252026202520262025

$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000

Cost

57,456 57,456 15,500 15,500 147,578 147,155 220,534 220,111

Impairment & accumulated amortisation

- - - - (80,444)(60,999)(80,444)(60,999)

Opening carrying amount

57,456 57,456 15,500 15,500 67,134 86,156 140,090 159,112

Additions

- - - - 2,146 3,948 2,146 3,948

Disposals, write offs & impairment

- - - - (1,409)(104)(1,409)(104)

Amortisation

3.3

- - - - (21,222)(22,866)(21,222)(22,866)

Closing carrying amount

57,456 57,456 15,500 15,500 46,649 67,134 119,605 140,090

Cost

57,456 57,456 15,500 15,500 147,479 147,578 220,435 220,534

Impairment & accumulated amortisation

- - - - (100,830)(80,444)(100,830)(80,444)

Closing carrying amount

57,456 57,456 15,500 15,500 46,649 67,134 119,605 140,090

Goodwill

Goodwill arises on the acquisition of subsidiaries and represents the excess of the consideration paid above the fair value of the net identifiable assets, liabilities

and contingent liabilities acquired.

Brand names

Brand names acquired in a business combination are recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. Brand names are considered to have indefinite useful lives

as the Group has rights to use these names in perpetuity.

Impairment of goodwill and brand names

Assets that have an indefinite useful life are reviewed annually for impairment or whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount

of the asset may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount.

Computer software (excluding cloud computing arrangements)

Internal and external costs directly incurred in the purchase or development of software controlled by the Group are recognised as intangible assets, including

subsequent improvements, when it is probable that they will generate a future economic benefit. Computer software is amortised using the straight-line method

over periods ranging from two to ten years.

Cloud computing arrangements

Cloud computing arrangements provide the Group with the right to access a supplier’s cloud based software for a specified contract period. If the Group does not

control the cloud based software, the related development costs (external and internal) are recognised as either:

(a) an expense when they are incurred for internal costs and the costs of an integrator not related to the software provider, or

(b) as a prepayment and then expensed over the term of the cloud computing arrangement for the costs of the software provider or its subcontractor.

Brand and goodwill impairment testing

The Group performs an annual impairment test of its brand and goodwill intangible assets by comparing their recoverable amounts with their carrying amounts.

Recoverable amounts are determined using the fair value less costs of disposal methodology.

The valuations are based on discounted cash flow projections that reflect management’s assessment of future operating performance. In determining the cash

flow forecasts, the Group considers a range of factors including Board-approved budgets, strategic plans, external market evidence, historical forecast accuracy

and current trading performance. The forecasts incorporate management’s best estimate of future economic conditions and expected earnings recovery, giving

appropriate weight to external evidence where available. The Group also engages external advisers to determine appropriate discount rates and long-term growth

rates, which are key assumptions used in the valuations.

The Group’s goodwill and brand assets are allocated to cash-generating units (CGUs), which represent the lowest level within the Group at which the assets are

monitored for internal management purposes. Details of these carrying amounts allocated to each CGU, together with the key assumptions used in the impairment

tests, including the assumptions applied to extrapolate cash flows beyond the five-year forecast period, are set out below.

Impairment testing

Noel LeemingThe Warehouse

2026202520262025

$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000

Goodwill

31,776 31,776 25,680 25,680

Brand names

15,500 15,500 - -

Closing carrying amount

47,276 47,276 25,680 25,680

Key assumptions

Terminal operating margin (%)

3.4 3.2 2.3 4.0

Terminal growth rate (%)

2.1 2.0 2.1 2.0

Pre-tax discount rate (%)

16.4 15.9 15.3 15.4

Post-tax discount rate (%)

11.8 11.5 11.1 11.1

Operating margin represents earnings before interest, taxation, unusual items and the impact of NZ IFRS 16. The Warehouse segment includes the Warehouse

Stationery business and Support Office functions. The annual impairment testing of the Noel Leeming and The Warehouse CGU indicated that recoverable amounts

exceeded carrying amounts and that sufficient headroom existed within each CGU. Accordingly, the attributed goodwill and brand assets were not impaired.

Material accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions

The impairment assessment of goodwill and brand assets, and the recoverability assessment of carried-forward tax losses (refer note 4.3), involve estimation

uncertainty because both rely on forecasts of future financial performance. Management assesses the reasonableness of these forecasts through consideration of

historical forecasting accuracy, external market evidence and sensitivity analysis of key assumptions. Based on this assessment, management concluded that the

recoverable amounts of both the Noel Leeming and The Warehouse CGU exceeded their carrying amounts and that sufficient future taxable profits are expected to

be available to support recognition of deferred tax assets arising from carried-forward tax losses.

Notes to the Financial Statements - Operating Assets and Liabilities

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

Notes to the Financial Statements - Operating Assets and Liabilities

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

4544

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements

10.0 LEASE LIABILITIES AND RIGHT OF USE ASSETS
10.1 Rights of use assets

CostAccumulated depreciationCarrying amount

Note202620252026202520262025

$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000

Opening balance

1,486,277 1,454,639 (896,090)(853,029)590,187 601,610

Foreign exchange movement

425 40 (170)(18)255 22

Additions

10.2

49,922 54,621 - - 49,922 54,621

Depreciation

3.3

- - (92,848)(93,333)(92,848)(93,333)

Reassessment of lease terms

10.2

36,292 27,267 - - 36,292 27,267

Lease surrenders and terminations

(22,953)(50,290)22,696 50,290 (257)-

Closing balance

1,549,963 1,486,277 (966,412)(896,090)583,551 590,187

A ‘lease liability’ and a corresponding ‘right of use’ asset is recognised when the Group commences a lease with a term exceeding 12 months and has sufficient

value to not be characterised as a low value lease. The initial lease liability and corresponding ‘right of use’ asset represent the present value of future lease

payments discounted using the Group’s incremental borrowing rate over the lease term including any contractual lease extension options considered reasonably

certain to be exercised. The future lease payments recognise contractual fixed rate lease payment adjustments but not adjustments made for inflation-indexed

lease payment increases.

Lease payments are allocated between the lease liability and the finance cost. The finance cost is charged to the income statement over the lease period to

produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period. The right of use asset is depreciated over the shorter of the

asset’s useful life and the lease term on a straight line basis.

The Group leases various warehouses, retail stores, equipment and vehicles. Property leases represent around 98% of the carrying value of the Group’s ‘right of use

assets’. The property leases are negotiated on an individual basis, typically for an initial period of 6 to 10 years and usually include extension options, but may also

contain a wide variety of other terms and conditions. Extension options provide the Group with operational flexibility in terms of managing the Group’s retail intensity

within different catchment areas. The majority of extension and termination options may only be exercised by the Group and not by the landlord.

10.2 Lease liabilities

Note20262025

$ 000$ 000

Opening balance

713,839 736,812

Foreign exchange movement

248 21

Additions

10.1

49,922 54,621

Interest

36,945 36,847

Reassessment of lease terms

10.1

36,292 27,267

Lease repayments

(131,650)(141,729)

Lease surrenders and terminations

(268)-

Closing balance

10.3

705,328 713,839

10.3 Lease liability maturity analysis

Gross lease paymentsInterestCarrying amount

202620252026202520262025

$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000

Within one year

132,775 126,919 (35,290)(34,397)97,485 92,522

One to two years

115,788 122,399 (28,230)(30,155)87,558 92,244

Two to five years

335,657 319,951 (63,312)(61,235)272,345 258,716

Beyond five years

280,774 302,258 (32,834)(31,901)247,940 270,357

Lease liability

864,994 871,527 (159,666)(157,688)705,328 713,839

Current lease liability

97,485 92,522

Non current lease liability

607,843 621,317

Lease liability

10.2 705,328 713,839

Material accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions

To quantify lease liabilities and ‘right of use’ carrying values requires the Group to use judgement to assess the appropriate lease term and estimates to determine

the incremental borrowing rate applied to calculate these amounts. These judgements and estimates can significantly impact the carrying value of both the right of

use asset and lease liabilities recognised in the balance sheet and corresponding expenses recorded in the income statement.

The Group uses the judgement of experts within its property department to assess the lease term at the inception of a lease and to reassess a lease term when a

significant event or significant change in circumstances within the control of Group affects the prospect that a right of renewal contained in a lease will be exercised.

The Group engages an independent valuation expert to establish the incremental borrowing rates applied to new and modified leases during the year. The average

incremental borrowing rate used to calculate the value of lease liabilities at balance date was 5.44% (2025: 5.23%).

Notes to the Financial Statements - Financing and Capital Structure

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

11.0 EQUITY

11.1 Capital management

Capital is defined by the Group to be the total equity as shown in the balance sheet. The Group’s capital management objectives are to safeguard the Group’s ability

to continue as a going concern, to provide an appropriate rate of return to shareholders, optimise the Group’s cost of capital and maintain a liquidity buffer (refer

note 11.2).

The Group reviews its capital structure annually, unless there is a material change requiring an earlier response and may make adjustments by means including

changes to the Group’s dividend pay-out ratio, issue of new shares, debt issuance, sale of assets or a combination of these.

Externally imposed capital requirements

The Group has a negative pledge arrangement with its funding providers that requires the parent and its guaranteeing Group companies to comply with certain

quarterly debt ratios and restrictive covenants. The calculation of these ratios is adjusted to exclude the impact of the NZ IFRS 16 Leases accounting standard. The

principal covenants at balance date were:

1) The gearing ratio will not exceed 60% during the first quarter ending October or exceed 50% in each of the remaining quarters of the year;

2) Interest cover will not be less than 6.5 times operating profit plus depreciation, for the 2026 financial year; and

3) Interest cover will not be less than 2.0 times operating profit, for subsequent years.

Depreciation for the purposes of the cover ratio calculations (above) includes software amortisation, but excludes ‘right of use asset’ amortisation. The Group was in

compliance with all aspects of the negative pledge covenants throughout the current and previous financial year.

11.2 Bank and debt facilities

20262025

$ 000$ 000

Cash and cash equivalents

41,883 39,206

Borrowings

(58,900)(135,300)

Net debt

(17,017)(96,094)

Committed bank credit facilities

345,000 450,000

Liquidity buffer

327,983 353,906

The Group’s liquidity policy requires a minimum liquidity buffer of $100 million, with a target above $150 million.

11.3 Contributed equity

Contributed equityOrdinary shares

2026202520262025

$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000

Share capital

365,517 365,517 346,843 346,843

Treasury shares

(5,282)(5,282)(1,489)(1,489)

Contributed equity

360,235 360,235 345,354 345,354

There were no changes to the Group’s contributed equity during the current year and previous year.

Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs, directly attributable to the issue of new shares, are shown in equity as a deduction from the proceeds

of the share issue.

Where the Group purchases its own equity share capital (treasury shares), the consideration paid, including any directly attributable incremental costs is

deducted from equity attributable to the shareholders until the shares are cancelled or reissued. Where such shares are reissued, any consideration received, net

of any directly attributable incremental transaction costs, is included in equity attributable to shareholders.

Ordinary shares on issue are fully paid and carry one vote per share and participate equally in dividends, other distributions from equity and any surplus on a

winding up of the Group. The Group retains its own ordinary shares which are used for employee share based payment arrangements. Voting rights attached to the

shares are held by the trustees of the employee share plans, and dividends paid on the shares are retained by the trustee for the benefit of the Group.

Notes to the Financial Statements - Operating Assets and Liabilities

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

4746

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements

11.4 Reserves
20262025

$ 000$ 000

Cash flow hedge reserve

126 (1,056)

Foreign currency translation reserve

485 220

Reserves

611 (836)

Cash flow hedge reserve

This reserve records the portion of the gain or loss on a hedging derivative in a cash flow hedge that is determined to be an effective hedge. The cumulative

deferred gain or loss on the hedge is recognised in the income statement when the hedged transaction impacts the income statement, or depending on the

nature of the hedge, is included in a non-financial hedged item when the hedged event occurs. (Refer to the consolidated statement of changes in equity and

accounting policies detailed in note 12.2).

Foreign currency translation

Exchange differences arising on translation of the Group’s subsidiaries in India and China are recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in a

separate reserve within equity. The cumulative amount is reclassified to the income statement when the net investment is sold.

11.5 Minority interest

20262025

$ 000$ 000

Opening balance

1,126 1,184

Net profit attributable to minority interest

292 337

Dividends paid to minority shareholders

(328)(395)

Closing balance

1,090 1,126

Minority interest reserve

A minority interest is an ownership position in a Group subsidiary where the minority shareholder owns less than 50% of outstanding shares and has no control

over decisions. Minority interests are measured based on the minority shareholders’ proportionate share of the net asset value of the subsidiary.

At balance date minority shareholders held a 50% (2025: 50%) shareholding in ChocolateWorks, a manufacturer of chocolate confectionery located in Waikato.

Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Risk Management

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

12.0 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT

12.1 Financial risk factors

The Group’s activities expose it to various financial risks including liquidity risk, credit risk and market risk. The Group’s overall risk management programme focuses

on the uncertainty of financial markets and seeks to minimise potential adverse effects on the Group’s financial performance.

The Group enters into forward currency contracts to manage the currency fluctuation risks arising from the Group’s overseas purchases.

Risk management is carried out by a central treasury department (Group Treasury) under policies approved by the Board of Directors. Group Treasury identifies,

evaluates and hedges financial risks in close co-operation with the Group’s operating units. The Board provides written principles for overall risk management, as

well as written policies covering specific areas, such as mitigating foreign exchange, interest rate and credit risks, use of derivative financial instruments and investing

excess cash.

12.2 Derivative financial instruments

20262025

$ 000$ 000

Forward exchange contract assets

2,618 3,908

Forward exchange contract liabilities

(2,672)(3,768)

Derivative financial instruments

(54)140

Classified as:

Cash flow hedges

174 (1,467)

Fair value hedges

(228)1,607

Derivative financial instruments

(54)140

Derivatives are initially recognised at fair value on the date a derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently remeasured to their fair value. The method

of recognising the resulting gain or loss depends on whether the derivative is designated as a hedging instrument, and if so, the nature of the item being hedged.

For the purposes of hedge accounting, hedges are classified as:

• Cash flow hedges when they hedge an exposure to a highly probable forecast transaction; or

• Fair value hedges when they hedge the exposure to changes in fair value of a recognised asset or liability.

The Group documents at the inception of the transaction the relationship between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management

objective and strategy for undertaking the hedge transactions. An assessment, both at hedge inception and on an ongoing basis is also documented, of whether

the derivatives that are used in hedging transactions have been and will continue to be highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of hedged

items.

Cash flow hedge

The Group applies cash flow hedge accounting to manage the currency risk associated with purchasing inventory in foreign currencies. The effective portion of

changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is recognised in equity in the cash flow hedge reserve. The gain or loss

relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the income statement.

Amounts accumulated in equity are recycled in the income statement in the periods when the hedged item will affect profit or loss. However, when the forecast

transaction that is hedged results in the recognition of a non-financial asset (for example, inventory), the gains and losses previously deferred in equity are

transferred from equity and included in the measurement of the initial cost or carrying amount of the asset or liability.

When a hedging instrument expires or is sold or terminated, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss

existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised when the forecast transaction is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a

forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was reported in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement.

Fair value hedge

The Group applies fair value hedge accounting for hedging to manage the currency risk associated with foreign currency trade creditors. Changes in the fair

value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with any changes in the fair value of the

hedged asset or liability that are attributed to the hedged risk. If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, or the hedge is not fully effective,

then the hedge or portion of the hedge which is not effective is recognised immediately in the income statement as a foreign exchange gain or loss.

Derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting

Certain derivative instruments do not qualify for hedge accounting. Changes in the fair value of any derivative instrument that does not qualify for hedge

accounting are recognised immediately in the income statement.

Material accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions

Hedge effectiveness

To assess hedge effectiveness for the Group’s currency derivatives, the Group forecasts overseas purchases for the next 18 months to confirm that the hedged

transactions remain highly probable. The testing method compares the critical terms of the hedged transactions with those of the related derivatives. The results

indicated that a high level of hedge effectiveness was expected.

Valuation

The Group’s derivatives are not traded in an active market, so quoted prices are not available to determine fair value. The Group therefore applies valuation

techniques based on observable market data. For accounting purposes under NZ IFRS 13, these valuations are classified as Level 2 fair value measurements because

they are derived from observable market inputs rather than quoted prices in an active market.

Notes to the Financial Statements - Financing and Capital Structure

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

4948

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements

12.3 Liquidity risk
Prudent liquidity risk management implies maintaining sufficient cash and the availability of funding through committed credit facilities to meet financial obligations

when they are due and being able to close out market positions if necessary. The Group monitors rolling forecasts of the Group’s liquidity position based on expected

cash flows to ensure a liquidity buffer is maintained in accordance with policy limits approved by the Board. The Group maintains funding flexibility by ensuring

availability using committed credit lines. The Group’s liquidity policy and committed credit facilities at balance date are detailed in note 11.1.

The table below details the Group’s derivatives and other financial liabilities (excluding lease liabilities - refer note 10.3).

Liabilities/(assets)

0 - 6 Months7 - 12 MonthsTotal

Note202620252026202520262025

$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000

Borrowings

11.2

58,900 135,300 - - 58,900 135,300

Trade and other payables

8.3

362,362 376,758 - - 362,362 376,758

Derivatives - gross settled

(forward exchange contracts)

- outflow

12.5

218,235 230,713 109,201 89,641 327,436 320,354

- inflow

(218,335)(231,903)(110,364)(89,922)(328,699)(321,825)

Financial liabilities and derivatives

421,162 510,868 (1,163)(281)419,999 510,587

12.4 Credit risk

Credit risk arises from the financial assets of the Group which are exposed to potential counterparty default, with a maximum exposure equal to the carrying amount

of these assets. In the normal course of business the Group incurs credit risk from trade and other receivables, derivatives and transactions with financial institutions.

The Group places its cash and short-term investments and derivatives with high credit quality financial institutions approved by the Board and in accordance with

specified treasury policy limits. The Group’s treasury policy requires bank counterparties to have a minimum Standard & Poor’s credit rating of at least A (2025: A).

The Group controls its credit risk from trade and other receivables by the application of credit approval, limits and monitoring procedures. Receivable balances are

monitored on an ongoing basis to ensure the Group’s bad debt exposure is not significant. Concentrations of credit risk exist when changes in economic, industry or

geographical factors similarly affect the group of counterparties whose aggregate credit exposure is significant in relation to the Group’s total credit exposure. As the

Group transacts with a diversity of counterparties it does not have any significant exposure to any individual customers, industry or economic sector.

12.5 Market risk

Foreign exchange risk

The Group purchases inventory directly from overseas suppliers, primarily priced in US dollars. To protect against exchange rate movements and manage the

inventory costing process, the Group enters into forward exchange contracts to purchase foreign currencies. These contracts hedge highly probable forecast

purchases and are timed to mature when the payments are scheduled to be settled. Management work to a Board approved Treasury Policy to manage this foreign

exchange risk. The policy parameters for hedging forecast currency exposures are:

• to hedge 80% to 100% of US dollar commitments expected in the next 0 to 4 months

• to hedge 50% to 90% of US dollar commitments expected in the next 5 to 12 months

• where exposures to other currencies arise, the Group hedges these risks once a firm commitment is in place

• specific approval is required to hedge foreign currency commitments extending beyond a 12-month time horizon.

Carrying valueNotional amount (NZD)Average exchange rate0 to 12 month hedge level

Currency position at balance date

20262025202620252026202520262025

$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000CentsCentsPercentagePercentage

Forward exchange contracts

Buy US dollars/Sell New Zealand dollars

(54)140 327,436 320,354 0.59120.5921 66.9 63.2

The spot rate used to determine the mark-to-market carrying value of the US dollar forward contracts at balance date was $0.5890 (2025: $0.5894).

The following sensitivity table, based on currency contracts and foreign currency trade creditors in existence at balance date, shows the positive/(negative) impact of

reasonably possible exchange rate movements on after tax profit and equity, with all other variables held constant.

+ 10 percent- 10 percent

Foreign currency sensitivity table

NoteAmountProfitEquityProfitEquity

$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000

At 2 August 2026

Foreign currency trade creditors

8.3

(71,588)4,686 4,686 (5,727)(5,727)

Derivative financial instruments

Forward exchange contracts - cash flow hedges

12.2

174 - (16,504)- 20,171

Currency forward contracts - fair value hedges

12.2

(228)(4,658)(4,658)5,693 5,693

Total increase/(decrease)

28 (16,476)(34)20,137

At 3 August 2025

Foreign currency trade creditors

8.3

(75,223)4,924 4,924 (6,018)(6,018)

Derivative financial instruments

Forward exchange contracts - cash flow hedges

12.2

(1,467)- (15,852)- 19,375

Forward exchange contracts - fair value hedges

12.2

1,607 (4,890)(4,890)5,977 5,977

Total increase/(decrease)

34 (15,818)(41)19,334

Notes to the Financial Statements - Other Disclosures

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

13.0 KEY MANAGEMENT

Key management includes the Directors of the Company and the members of the Group’s Leadership Team during the year, comprising the Group Chief Executive

Officer and his 11 (2025: 6) direct reports at balance date. Compensation paid to Directors and other members of key management of the Group is set out in the two

tables below:

Directors’ fees

20262025

$ 000$ 000

J W M Journee (appointed as interim Group CEO from May 2024 to July 2025, appointed Chair November 2025)

165 -

A J Balfour (retired November 2024)

- 39

A J Carter

117 118

D R Hamilton

114 114

C M Rainsford

94 94

H J Rumbold (appointed November 2025)

63 -

R E Taulelei

115 117

R J Tindall (resigned November 2025)

38 107

J Withers (Chair until retired in November 2025)

61 183

Total

767 772

During the 2026 financial year, J W M Journee received $148,000 for advisory services provided to the Group in addition to his director services. His role as interim

Group CEO ended in July 2025, and remuneration of $1,747,936 for the 2025 financial year, in his capacity as Group CEO and Executive Director, is included in the key

management remuneration table below.

Key management

20262025

$ 000$ 000

Base salary

6,877 5,691

Retention (cash settled)

240 120

Annual performance based compensation

2,508 375

Three year performance based compensation (cash settled)

533 437

Termination benefits

357 564

Total

10,515 7,187

14.0 COMMITMENTS

Capital expenditure contracted for at balance date, but not recognised as liabilities, is set out below

Capital commitments

20262025

$ 000$ 000

Within one year

1,261 1,957

15.0 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES

20262025

$ 000$ 000

Standby letter of credit

17,500 17,500

Bank guarantees provided to landlords and the New Zealand Exchange Limited

315 315

Contingent liabilities

17,815 17,815

16.0 RELATED PARTIES

During the period, the Group has not entered into any material contracts involving related parties or Directors’ interests which are not disclosed. No amounts owed

by related parties have been written off or forgiven during the period.

Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Risk Management

For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026

5150

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements


PricewaterhouseCoopers, PwC Tower, 15 Customs Street West,

Private Bag 92162, Auckland 1142, New Zealand

+64 9 355 8000

pwc.co.nz

Independent auditor’s report

To the shareholders of The Warehouse Group Limited

Our opinion

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated financial statements (the financial statements) of The Warehouse

Group Limited (the Company), including its subsidiaries (the Group), present fairly, in all material respects, the

financial position of the Group as at 2 August 2026, its financial performance, and its cash flows for the 52 week

period then ended in accordance with New Zealand Equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards (NZ

IFRS) and International Financial Reporting Standards Accounting Standards (IFRS Accounting Standards).

What we have audited

The Group's financial statements comprise:

• the consolidated balance sheet as at 2 August 2026;

• the consolidated income statement for the 52 week period then ended;

• the consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the 52 week period then ended;

• the consolidated statement of changes in equity for the 52 week period then ended;

• the consolidated statement of cash flows for the 52 week period then ended; and

• the notes to the financial statements, comprising material accounting policy information and other explanatory

information.

Basis for opinion

We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (New Zealand) (ISAs (NZ)) and

International Standards on Auditing (ISAs). Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in the

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report.

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

Independence

We are independent of the Group in accordance with Professional and Ethical Standard 1 International Code of

Ethics for Assurance Practitioners (including International Independence Standards) (New Zealand) issued by

the New Zealand Auditing and Assurance Standards Board (PES 1) and the International Code of Ethics for

Professional Accountants (including International Independence Standards) issued by the International Ethics

Standards Board for Accountants (IESBA Code), as applicable to audits of financial statements of public interest

entities. We have also fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with PES 1 and the IESBA Code.


2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading

activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of

the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2

August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test include the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;


2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading

activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of

the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2

August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test include the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;


2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provi des revi ew and agreed-upon procedures servi ces. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our fi rm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordi nary course of tradi ng

activi ties of the business. The fi rm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit mat ters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our profe ssional judgement, were of most signifi cance in our audit of

the fi nancial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

fi nancial statements as a whole, and in fo rming our opinion thereon, and we do not provi de a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at

2


August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test included the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;


2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading

activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of

the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2

August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test include the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;


2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading

activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of

the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2

August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test include the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;


2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading

activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of

the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2

August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test include the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;


2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading

activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of

the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2

August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test include the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;

5352

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements


3 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

The Warehouse’s impairment assessment is

considered a key audit matter due to the significance

of the carrying value of the goodwill and other assets

allocated to the CGU as well as significant judgement

involved in estimating future business performance,

particularly the timing and extent of the forecast

earnings recovery. This judgement is heightened by

the uncertainty associated with achieving forecast

improvement in operating margins.

Key assumptions included in the impairment

assessment are:

• forecast future cash flows, which include

estimates and assumptions around operating

margin in the terminal year;

• discount rate; and

• terminal growth rate.

The CGU’s recoverable amount reflects the

uncertainty surrounding the timing and extent of the

expected earnings recovery. Based on the

assumptions above, management concluded that

sufficient headroom exists within each CGU and no

impairment of goodwill has been recognised.

Refer to note 9.2 of the financial statements for

further information.

• agreeing forecast future performance included in the FVLCOD

impairment assessment to the model approved by the Board;

• assessing and challenging the reasonableness of the forecast

cash flows, including management’s estimates and assumptions

around the terminal operating margin, with reference to historical

performance and external market evidence;

• assessing, with the assistance of our auditor's expert, the

reasonableness of the discount rate and terminal growth rate

used within the impairment assessment;

• evaluating management’s sensitivity analysis to ascertain the

impact of reasonably possible changes in key assumptions;

• performing our own sensitivity analysis and stress testing the

cash flow forecasts to determine whether reasonably possible

adverse changes in the key assumptions would result in a

material impairment; and

• assessing the disclosures in note 9.2 relating to the impairment

methodology and key assumptions used in The Warehouse CGU

impairment assessment.

Our audit approach

Overview


Overall group materiality: $11,500,000, which represents approximately 0.38% of total revenues.

We chose total revenues as the benchmark because, in our view, it is a key financial statement metric

used in assessing the performance of the Group and it is a generally accepted benchmark.

Full scope audits were performed for the Group’s two trading entities based on their financial

significance.

Specified audit procedures were performed over certain remaining entities.

As reported above, we have two key audit matters, being:

• Inventory valuation

• Goodwill impairment assessment – The Warehouse

As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the

financial statements. In particular, we considered where management made subjective judgements; for example, in

respect of significant accounting estimates that involved making assumptions and considering future events that are

inherently uncertain. As in all of our audits, we also addressed the risk of management override of internal controls,

including among other matters, consideration of whether there was evidence of bias that represented a risk of

material misstatement due to fraud.


2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading

activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of

the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2

August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test include the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;


2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading

activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of

the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2

August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test include the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;


2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading

activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of

the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2

August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test include the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;


2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading

activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of

the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2

August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test include the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;


4 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

Materiality

The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. An audit is designed to obtain reasonable

assurance about whether the financial statements are free from material misstatement. Misstatements may arise

due to fraud or error. They are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be

expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of the financial statements.

Based on our professional judgement, we determined certain quantitative thresholds for materiality, including the

overall group materiality for the financial statements as a whole as set out above. These, together with qualitative

considerations, helped us to determine the scope of our audit, the nature, timing and extent of our audit

procedures, and to evaluate the effect of misstatements, both individually and in the aggregate, on the financial

statements as a whole.

How we tailored our group audit scope

We tailored the scope of our audit in order to perform sufficient work to enable us to provide an opinion on the

financial statements as a whole, taking into account the structure of the Group, the accounting processes and

controls, and the industry in which the Group operates.

Other information

The Directors are responsible for the other information. The other information comprises the information included

in the Annual Report (which includes the Sustainability Report by way of cross-reference), but does not include the

financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon.

Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and we do not express any form of

audit opinion or assurance conclusion thereon.

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in

doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our

knowledge obtained in the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If, based on the work we have

performed on the other information that we obtained prior to the date of this auditor’s report, we conclude that

there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have nothing to

report in this regard.

Responsibilities of the Directors for the financial statements

The Directors are responsible, on behalf of the Company, for the preparation and fair presentation of the financial

statements in accordance with NZ IFRS and IFRS Accounting Standards, and for such internal control as the

Directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material

misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s ability to continue as a

going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern, and using the going concern basis of

accounting unless the Directors either intend to liquidate the Group or to cease operations, or have no realistic

alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements, as a whole, are free from

material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion.

Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with

ISAs (NZ) and ISAs will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud

or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to

influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.


2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading

activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of

the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2

August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test include the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;


2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading

activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of

the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2

August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test include the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;


2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading

activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of

the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2

August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test include the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;

5554

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements


5 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located at the External

Reporting Board’s website at:

https://www.xrb.govt.nz/standards/assurance-standards/auditors-responsibilities/audit-report-1-1/

This description forms part of our auditor’s report.

Who we report to

This report is made solely to the Company’s shareholders, as a body. Our audit work has been undertaken so that

we might state those matters which we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose.

To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company

and the Company’s shareholders, as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

The engagement partner on the audit resulting in this independent auditor’s report is Philippa (Pip) Cameron.

For and on behalf of:

PricewaterhouseCoopers Auckland

29 September 2026



2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report

In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain

partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading

activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of

the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the

financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on

these matters.

Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Inventory valuation

The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2

August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory

provisions of $18.9 million.

To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at

the lower of cost and net realisable value by

deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which

are determined based on various factors including

historical data, current selling trends, and product

information from buyers within the business.

Determining the appropriate level of provisions

involves judgement, including management's

expectations of future sales levels and future selling

prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating

the inventory provisions, and the significance of the

inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the

audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was

particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in

total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.

Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the

accounting policy for inventory and the judgements

and estimates applied by management to determine

the inventory provisions.

We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls

surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and

implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the

cyclical count process.

Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:

• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures

throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to

confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and

accounted for;

• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category

level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total

stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and

understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;

• holding discussions with management to understand the

assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;

• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by

comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual

inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;

• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the

lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded

cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs

necessary to make the sale;

• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and

checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in

accordance with the Group policy; and

• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by

comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52

week period.

Goodwill impairment assessment – The

Warehouse

Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated

to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit

(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7

million.

Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the

area of greatest impairment judgement within the

Group. While FY26 performance showed some

improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to

be adversely impacted by challenging trading

conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating

performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial

statements.

Management performed an annual impairment

assessment to determine the recoverable amount

using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value

less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.


Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management

impairment test include the following:

• understanding the processes undertaken by management in

performing the impairment test;

• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s

process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed

effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;

• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU

assessment;

• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and

cost of doing business to the CGU;

• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the

original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to

accurately forecast;

• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,

the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings

recovery expectations;

5756

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements

5958
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report

Governance

Report

At The Warehouse Group, we are committed to the highest standards of corporate governance

and ethical conduct.

We believe that these values help to create sustainable long-term value for our shareholders,

build a strong team, improve the experience we offer our customers and contribute to our

place within the wider community.

This corporate governance statement provides an overview of the policies and processes that

are in place at The Warehouse Group Limited (the Company) which ensure that the highest

standards of corporate governance are maintained. The Company notes and supports the

updated NZX Corporate Governance Code dated 31 March 2026 (NZX Code).

This statement follows the structure of the NZX Code and addresses its recommendations.

The Company’s Constitution, the Board and committee charters, codes and policies referred

to in this statement are available at www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/about-us/corporate-

governance.

6160
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Our Board

Our

Board

John Journee

BCom, CFinstD, MAICD

Chair and Non-Executive Director

John was Interim CEO and Executive

Director of the Company from May 2024

to July 2025, during which time he was

considered to be non-independent. From

August 2025, John returned to the Board

as a non-independent, non-executive

Director. He has been appointed Chair

effective from the close of the 2025

Annual Shareholders’ Meeting. John has

had an extensive retail career, including

executive experience across sectors

that span general merchandise, fashion

apparel, FMCG, consumer electronics,

telecommunications, hospitality and

electricity retailing. His career has

included 15 years with The Warehouse

Group, starting as a joint-venture

partner in 1990 and progressing through

senior roles in operations, marketing,

merchandise, international sourcing

and business development. John has

also held CEO roles with Noel Leeming

and foodservice distributor Southern

Hospitality.

Committees:

• Health, Safety and Wellbeing

Committee

• Disclosure Committee

• People and Remuneration

Committee

• Audit and Risk Committee

• Corporate Governance and

Nominations Committee

• Environmental and Social

Sustainability Committee (until

dissolution of the Committee

effective 1 December 2025)

Other Directorships:

• Farmlands Society

• Colonial Motor Company Limited

• Data Insights Group Advisory Board

Dean Hamilton

BCA

Independent Non-Executive Director

Dean has significant CEO and financial

markets experience. Most recently

he was CEO of Silver Fern Farms

Limited, where he led the business

successfully through a period of

significant change and improvement

in financial performance, staff and

supplier engagement, sustainability,

and consumer trust in brand. Dean’s

prior experience includes 12 years at

global investment bank Deutsche

Bank, working in both Australia and

New Zealand, where he advised a wide

range of companies on mergers and

acquisitions, capital management,

corporate restructuring and capital

raising.

Committees:

• Audit and Risk Committee (Chair)

• Disclosure Committee (Chair)

• Corporate Governance and

Nominations Committee (Chair)

• Health, Safety and Wellbeing

Committee

Other Directorships:

• Fulton Hogan Limited (Chair)

• Auckland International Airport

Limited

• Tappenden Holdings Limited

• Ryman Healthcare Limited (Chair)

Antony (Tony) Carter

CNZM, BE (Hons), ME, MPhil

Independent Non-Executive Director

Tony has a broad range of experience

in governance across the consumer,

industrial services, infrastructure and

energy sectors. Tony currently chairs the

boards of My Food Bag Group Limited,

Skin Institute Holding Company Limited,

Datacom Group Limited, TR Group

Limited and The Interiors Group Holdco

Limited and is a director of Ravensdown

Limited and Sanford Limited. His

previous directorships include roles

at Fisher & Paykel Healthcare, Air New

Zealand Limited, Fletcher Building

Limited, ANZ Bank New Zealand

Limited and Vector Limited. He has

previously served as managing director

of supermarket operator Foodstuffs

Auckland and Foodstuffs New Zealand.

In 2020 he was made a Companion

of the New Zealand Order of Merit for

Services to Business Governance.

Committees:

• Health, Safety and Wellbeing

Committee (Chair)

• Audit and Risk Committee

Other Directorships:

• My Food Bag Group Limited (Chair)

• Skin Institute Holding Company

Limited (Chair)

• Datacom Group Limited (Chair)

• TR Group Limited (Chair)

• The Interiors Group Holdco Limited

(Chair)

• Ravensdown Limited

• Sanford Limited

Rachel Taulelei

CNZM, LLB

Ngāti Raukawa ki te Tonga, Ngāti Rārua

Independent Non-Executive Director

Rachel is a prominent business

leader and a strong advocate for the

Māori economy and values-based

business models. Her commitment

to kaitiakitanga has been evident

throughout her career, as founder of

sustainable seafood company Yellow

Brick Road in 2006, to her time as CEO

of Māori-owned food and beverage

company Kono, and now in her current

role as co-founder of business design

and brand strategy firm Oho. Rachel

has held a number of governance

roles and presently serves as a director

on the board of Mercury NZ Limited,

ANZCO Foods Limited, and Wellington

International Airport Limited. She is

Chair of NZ Rugby’s Appointments

and Remuneration Panel, co-owner of

professional women’s basketball team

the Tokomanawa Queens, and acts as

an advisor to the Centre for Strategic

Philanthropy, venture capital firm Movac,

and Huia Publishing.

Committees:

• People and Remuneration

Committee (Chair)

• Health, Safety and Wellbeing

Committee

• Corporate Governance and

Nominations Committee

• Environmental and Social

Sustainability Committee (until

dissolution of the Committee

effective 1 December 2025)

Other Directorships:

• ANZCO Foods Limited

• Wellington International Airport

Limited

• Mercury NZ Limited

Hamish Rumbold

BCom/BProp

Independent Non-Executive Director

Hamish is a Non-Executive Director

with multi-sector expertise across

key governance domains: customer

experience, digital and data

strategy, technology transformation,

cybersecurity, and risk and compliance.

He is a governance professional and

a graduate of the Australian Institute

of Company Directors (AICD). Hamish

currently serves as a Non-Executive

Director for House of Travel Holdings,

Ryman Healthcare, and Livestock

Improvement Corporation (LIC). He

is also the Non-Executive Director

and Chair of Perigee HoldCo Limited,

a majority private equity-owned

FX remittance business trading as

OrbitRemit. Hamish previously held

general management and executive

roles with Air New Zealand and

Kiwibank.

Committees:

• Health, Safety and Wellbeing

Committee

• People and Remuneration

Committee

Other Directorships:

• Livestock Improvement Corporation

Limited (LIC)

• Ryman Healthcare Limited

• House of Travel Holdings Limited

• Perigee HoldCo Limited

Caroline Rainsford

BCom (Hons)

Independent Non-Executive Director

Caroline is the Country Director for

Google NZ, where she is responsible for

driving the overall revenue and business

strategy for New Zealand. Partnering

with government, policy teams and

New Zealand business leaders, she

is focused on helping New Zealand

businesses grow and transform in the

digital age. Prior to joining Google in

2017, Caroline was the Marketing and

Product Director for the Latitude NZ

(previously GE Capital) business as well

as the Brand Director for the Australian

and New Zealand regions. Her earlier

career included roles with Philips Royal

Electronics in the Middle East, Turkey

and Africa. Caroline holds a Bachelor of

Commerce (Hons) from the University of

Auckland.

Committees:

• Health, Safety and Wellbeing

Committee

• People and Remuneration

Committee

Other Directorships:

• Otereti Limited

• Tech NZ (Board Member)

6362
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Executive Leadership Team

Silv Roest

Group Chief Legal, Corporate Affairs and

Sustainability Officer

Silv joined the business in 2024

as General Counsel and Company

Secretary and was appointed Group

Chief Legal, Corporate Affairs and

Sustainability Officer in August

2025, while continuing in her role as

Company Secretary.

Before joining the business, Silv held

senior legal and governance roles at

Spark New Zealand and began her

legal career at Russell McVeagh. Silv

holds degrees in Law and Commerce

from the University of Otago.

Executive

Leadership Team

Mark Stirton

Group Chief Executive Officer

Mark joined the business as Chief

Financial Officer in 2024 and was

appointed Group Chief Executive

Officer in August 2025.

Mark spent a decade with South

African retailer Mr Price Group, where

he held several senior leadership

roles, including Group Chief Financial

Officer. Before that, he held leadership

roles at Aspen Pharmacare and

Eurotap Investments and began his

career with PwC. Mark is a Chartered

Accountant, Fellow Certified

Management Accountant and holds

an MBA in Global Digital Business and

Transformation from the University of

Barcelona.

Stefan Knight

Group Chief Financial Officer

Stefan joined the business in August

2025 after more than twenty years

with Spark New Zealand, where he

most recently served as Financial

Director. He began his career in audit

and corporate finance with Deloitte.

A Chartered Accountant, Stefan holds

a Bachelor of Commerce in Accounting

and Finance from the University of

Auckland and has completed the

CFO Leadership Program at Harvard

Business School.

Richard Parker

Group Chief People Officer

Richard joined the business in 2019 as

General Manager, People Experience,

Remuneration and Employee

Relations and was appointed Group

Chief People Officer in 2020.

He began his career as a litigation

lawyer with Chapman Tripp before

moving to Fletcher Challenge as

corporate legal counsel. He later held

senior people leadership roles at Spark

New Zealand and TVNZ. Richard holds

an LLB (Hons) and MPhil (Hons) from

the University of Auckland.

Shayne Tong

Group Chief Digital and Transformation

Officer

Shayne Tong joined The Warehouse

Group in August 2025 as Group Chief

Digital and Transformation Officer,

leading the Group’s enterprise

technology, digital and business

transformation agenda. He brings

more than 20 years’ experience leading

large-scale transformation, including

senior executive roles with Foodstuffs

South Island, Auckland District Health

Board, Genesis Energy and Fletcher

Building. Shayne is a Chartered

Accountant and holds a Bachelor of

Business degree in Accounting from

Auckland University of Technology.

Lyle Brady

Group Chief Supply Chain Officer

Lyle joined the business in 2023 as

General Manager Supply Chain and

was appointed Group Chief Supply

Chain Officer in November 2025.

Before moving to New Zealand, he

held senior supply chain leadership

roles with Massmart (Walmart Africa).

Lyle began his career in audit with

Deloitte and McGladrey and holds a

BCompt Honours degree in Auditing

and Tax. He is also a Member of the

Chartered Institute of Procurement &

Supply.

Ian Carter

Chief Operations Officer – The Warehouse /

Warehouse Stationery

Ian joined The Warehouse Group

in 2019 and was appointed Chief

Operations Officer in 2021, leading

store operations, experience and

development, Warehouse Stationery,

and property.

Ian brings over 25 years of international

retail leadership experience delivering

operational transformation and

improving customer experience at

scale. Prior to joining The Warehouse

Group, he held senior leadership roles

with McKesson UK, Halfords and B&Q.

Ankit Gupta

Group Chief Data and AI Officer

Ankit was appointed Group Chief Data

and AI Officer in January 2026.

He joined the business in 2022 and

has held several senior technology

leadership roles, most recently leading

Group Technology. Prior to joining The

Warehouse Group, he held technology

leadership positions at Spark New

Zealand and One NZ. Ankit holds

a Bachelor’s degree in Computer

Science from SRM Institute of Science

and Technology and an MBA in Digital

Transformation, AI and Blockchain

from the University of Barcelona.

Jason Bell

Chief Executive Officer - Noel Leeming

Jason Bell has more than 30 years’

experience with Noel Leeming and

serves as Chief Executive Officer. Since

joining the business as an Appliance

Buyer, he has held a range of senior

leadership roles across merchandise

and operations, including Executive

General Manager Merchandise and

Chief Operating Officer. Jason holds

a Postgraduate Diploma in Business

Administration from the University of

Auckland.

Carrie Fairley

Chief Merchandise Officer – The Warehouse

/ Warehouse Stationery

Carrie joined the business in 2011 and

was appointed Chief Merchandise

Officer in August 2025.

She has held a range of senior

merchandise and planning leadership

roles and brings extensive retail

experience from New Zealand and

South Africa, including roles with

Number One Shoes, Truworths

and Edcon. Carrie holds a Bachelor

of Science (Honours) in Business

Management from Birmingham City

University.

Frankie Coulter

Chief Marketing Officer – The Warehouse /

Warehouse Stationery

Frankie joined the business in January

2026 as Chief Marketing Officer.

He brings more than 25 years of

marketing and brand leadership

experience across New Zealand and

international markets. Before joining

The Warehouse Group, he held senior

marketing leadership roles with a

range of well-known consumer brands,

including Goodman Fielder, Wattie’s,

Kellogg’s, Boots and Durex. Frankie

was named New Zealand Marketer of

the Year in 2024 and became a fellow

of the Global Marketing Academy in

March 2025.

Deric Fairley

Acting Chief Planning Officer – The

Warehouse / Warehouse Stationery

Deric was appointed Acting Chief

Planning Officer in December 2025.

He brings more than 25 years of

merchandise planning and retail

experience across New Zealand

and South Africa, including senior

leadership roles with The Warehouse

Group, EziBuy, Billabong, Edcon and

Truworths. Deric holds a Bachelor of

Technology in Retail and Business

Management from Cape Peninsula

University of Technology.

6564
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report

Corporate Governance

This governance statement was approved by the Board on 29

September 2026 and is current as at that date.

As at the date of the publication of this Annual Report, the

Company considers its governance practices are compliant

with the NZX Code, but for Recommendation 2.9 to have an

independent chair of the board (further explanation can be found

on page 65).

Principle 1 – Ethical Standards

“Directors should set high standards of ethical behaviour, model

this behaviour and hold management accountable for these

standards being followed throughout the organisation.”

The Company is committed to fostering the highest standards

of ethical behaviour and good conduct. We believe this is at the

heart of having a reputation as a trusted and respected company

that promotes honesty, integrity and ethical conduct across the

organisation in decision-making and day-to-day behaviour.

Code of Ethics

The Company’s Code of Ethics sets out the standards of conduct

expected of everyone working at The Warehouse Group, including

Directors, team members, contractors and any other person

engaged by the Company. The Code of Ethics sets out the

principles that guide decision-making and sets expectations of

the conduct that is consistent with the Company’s values and

behaviours, business goals and legal obligations. An introduction

to the Code of Ethics forms part of the induction and training

process of new employees.

The Company has an external hotline and web address (managed

by an independent third party), which any employee can

contact confidentially if they wish to report any misconduct or

other concerning behaviour at The Warehouse Group, including

breaches of the Code of Ethics.

The Code of Ethics also outlines the potential consequences of,

and internal reporting procedures for, any breaches. Sanctions

for breaches may include serious disciplinary action, removal

from office and dismissal, to the extent permitted by law and as

appropriate given the specific circumstances.

The Code of Ethics is available in the Corporate Governance

section of the Company’s website.

Financial Products Trading Policy

The Company is committed to transparency and fairness in

dealing with all its stakeholders and to ensuring adherence to all

applicable laws and regulations. The Financial Products Trading

Policy governs trading in the Company’s securities by Directors,

team members and other associated persons. The policy and

timing of black-out periods is set out in the Financial Products

Trading Policy, which is available in the Corporate Governance

section of our website.

Principle 2 – Board Composition and

Performance

“To ensure an effective Board, there should be a balance of

independence, skills, knowledge, experience and perspectives.”

Responsibilities of the Board

The central role of the Board is to set the strategic direction

of the Company, to select and appoint the Company’s Group

Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and to oversee the Company’s

management and business activities, with the primary objective

to create and continue to build sustainable value for shareholders.

This requires consideration of, and regular engagement with,

all stakeholders that are critical to our success, including

shareholders, employees, customers, suppliers and communities,

as determined by the Company and the Board.

The Board Charter, which is available in the Corporate Governance

section of the Company’s website, sets out how the Board will

achieve its purpose. The Charter is reviewed at least every two

years and it was last reviewed in September 2026. The Board’s

responsibilities, as described in the Charter, are set out in the

adjacent table.

Management and administration of the Company is undertaken

by the Group CEO, who is assisted by the executive leadership

team, in accordance with the strategy, plans and delegations

approved by the Board. The Board has implemented appropriate

procedures to enable Management to undertake its delegated

duties and for performance to be assessed.

Board Responsibilities

Strategy

and

Planning

• Set strategic direction and appropriate operating

frameworks

• Monitor Management’s performance within those

frameworks

People

Resources

• Ensure that the Board is, and remains

appropriately skilled, to meet the changing needs

of the Company

• Ensure there are adequate resources available to

meet the Company’s objectives

• Appoint and remove the Group CEO and oversee

succession plans for the executive leadership

team

• Set criteria for, and evaluate the performance of,

the Group CEO and approve their remuneration

• Regularly review, approve and adopt the Diversity

and Inclusion Policy and diversity objectives,

and annually measure achievement against the

objectives

Financial

Performance

and Risk

• Approve and monitor financial reporting and

capital management including the payment of

dividends

• Approve the Company’s operating budgets and

any major capital expenditures by the Company

• Monitor the financial solvency of the Company

• Approve the appointment and retention of the

external auditor, and, subject to shareholder

approval being granted, fix the fees and expenses

• Ensure that effective risk management

procedures are in place and are being used

Health and

Safety

• Ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, a safe

and healthy working environment is provided

and maintained for all employees, customers,

contractors and visitors

Ethical

Behaviour

and

Corporate

Governance

• Promote and authorise ethical and responsible

decision-making by the Company

• Ensure the Company has appropriate corporate

governance structures in place including

standards of ethical behaviour

• Approve timely and balanced communication to

shareholders

• Oversee and approve the Company’s

environmental and social sustainability strategy,

ensuring it is aspirational, aligned with the

Company’s purpose and long-term value creation,

supported by appropriate policies, resourcing and

organisational design, complies with applicable

legal and regulatory requirements, and is

monitored against clear objectives, metrics and

targets

The Board

The Board comprises six Directors: John Journee (Chair), Tony

Carter, Dean Hamilton, Caroline Rainsford, Rachel Taulelei, and

Hamish Rumbold. Director profiles are available on pages 60 and

61.

Chair

John Journee is the Chair of The Warehouse Group Board. He was

first appointed in 2025 and is a non-independent, non-executive

Director.

The Chair’s responsibilities include:

• Providing leadership to the Board and to the Company

• Ensuring the efficient organisation and conduct of the Board

• Monitoring Board performance annually

• Facilitating Board discussions to ensure core issues facing the

Company are addressed

• Briefing all Directors in relation to issues arising at Board meetings

• Facilitating the effective contribution and ongoing development

of all Directors

• Promoting consultative and respectful relations between Board

members and between the Board and Management

• Chairing Board and shareholder meetings

The Warehouse Group Board Charter states that the Board Chair

must not also be the Company’s Chief Executive Officer.

Director Appointments

Procedures for the appointment and removal of Directors are

governed by the Company’s Constitution and the NZX Listing

Rules. The Corporate Governance and Nominations Committee is

delegated responsibility for identifying and nominating, for the

approval of the Board, candidates to fill Board vacancies as and

when they arise.

In doing so the Committee will seek to identify the necessary and

desirable competencies which will ensure that any candidate it

puts forward will enable the Board to:

• Fulfil its responsibilities

• Represent a variety of skills, expertise and experience (including

commercial and/or industry experience and diversity of background

and thought)

• Competently address accounting, finance and legal matters

The terms and conditions of appointment are set out in a

letter of appointment that details the Director’s duties, term of

appointment (subject to shareholder approval), expectations

of the role and remuneration. A copy of the standard letter is

available in the Corporate Governance section of the Company’s

website.

The Company indemnifies and provides insurance to Directors in

accordance with the Companies Act 1993, for certain claims that

may be brought against them as Directors.

Director Induction and Development

When appointed to the Board, all new Directors undergo a

detailed induction programme to familiarise them with the

Company’s businesses and strategy. Ongoing training includes

briefings by senior management and guest speakers on relevant

industry and competitive issues and site visits.

Director Independence and Conflicts

The factors that the Board considers when determining the

independence of a Director, including the requirements of the

NZX Corporate Governance Code, are set out in full in the Board

Charter. The Board assesses the independence of each Director on

their appointment and at least annually thereafter.

Of the Board’s six Directors, Tony Carter, Dean Hamilton, Caroline

Rainsford, Rachel Taulelei and Hamish Rumbold have been

determined to be independent non-executive Directors. In

making this determination, consideration was given to whether

any Director had a disqualifying relationship (as defined in the

NZX Listing Rules), the factors detailed in the NZX Corporate

Governance Code, and any other matters that might be relevant

to Directors’ independence.

Consideration was given to Caroline Rainsford’s role as Country

Director of Google, a provider of material professional services

to the Company, in the context of one of the factors in the NZX

Corporate Governance Code. The Board has formed the view that,

given that:

• advertising and marketing spend and activity is typically a

management decision rather than a matter which comes to the

Board for consideration; and

• Caroline Rainsford does not have any direct involvement with

the Company’s business with Google; and

• any conflicts that may arise from time to time can be effectively

managed;

Caroline Rainsford’s role will not interfere with her capacity to

bring an independent judgement to bear on issues before the

Board, and to act in the best interests of the Company and its

shareholders.

John Journee was Interim Group CEO from 20 May 2024 to

31 July 2025 during which time he was considered to be not

independent. On 1 August 2025, John Journee ceased to be

Interim Group CEO and remains not independent due to his

recent responsibilities as Interim Group CEO and tenure on the

Board.

John Journee was appointed Chair effective from the end of the

2025 Annual Shareholders’ Meeting following Dame Joan Withers’

resignation from the Board, and is a non-independent director.

Recommendation 2.9 of the NZX Corporate Governance Code

recommends that the Chair be independent. The commentary

to the recommendation notes that an independent Chair can

contribute to a culture of openness and constructive challenge

that allows a diversity of views to be considered by the Board, and

can promote constructive and respectful relations between the

Board and management. While John Journee is not considered an

independent Chair under the NZX Corporate Governance Code,

the Board believes his governance and leadership experience,

together with his recent service as Interim Group CEO, provide

important continuity of leadership as the Group continues its

turnaround. The Board considers Mr Journee’s extensive retail

experience, knowledge of the Group and diverse perspectives

from his other governance roles, positions him well to stimulate

balanced Board discussion.

The Board is conscious of its obligation to ensure that Directors

avoid conflicts of interest between their duty to the Company

and their own interests. Where potential conflicts of interest arise

then the Director must disclose their interest. Directors and team

members are required to minimise any potential conflicts, in

accordance with the Company’s Code of Ethics.

Board Structure, Skills and Composition

The Board comprises Directors with a mix of qualifications, skills

and experience appropriate to the Company’s existing operations

and strategic direction. A comprehensive matrix of Director

skills is set out on page 66, and qualifications and experience of

individual Directors are detailed on pages 60 and 61.

6766
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report

Relevant Board Skills to Execute Group Strategy

John

Journee

Dean

Hamilton

Rachel

Taulelei

Caroline

Rainsford

Tony

Carter

Hamish

Rumbold

Industry Specific

Operational experience in the retail industry

Brand, marketing and customer experience

Integrated retail experience

Digital and technology experience

Direct sourcing experience

Logistics experience

Specific to Group Strategy

Development of a high-performance culture

Senior leadership of change management at scale

Transformation and business disruption experience

Innovation and entrepreneurism

Government relations

Union relations

Environment and Corporate Social Responsibility experience

Subject-matter Expertise

Development and execution of business strategy

Governance experience

Large-company leadership experience

Finance/accounting expertise

Audit committee/risk management experience

Regulatory knowledge and experience

Health and safety experience

HR Learning and development experience

Financial markets experience

Community and iwi relationships

Shareholder and investor relations experience

Takeover Protocols

The Company has takeover protocols in place that meet the requirements of the NZX Corporate Governance Code.

Board Evaluation

The Chair, from time to time, with the assistance of appropriate external advisors, regularly assesses the performance of individual

Directors, while Directors also assess the collective performance of the Board and the performance of the Chair. A Board evaluation was

undertaken in October 2025 and an independent review will be undertaken in FY27.

Board Tenure

The Constitution provides that the minimum size of the Board shall not at any time be fewer than five and the Board has fixed the

maximum number of Directors to be 10. Each year, any Director who is required by the NZX Listing Rules or the Company’s Constitution

to retire will retire from office and may offer themselves for re-election at the Annual Shareholders’ Meeting.

The Board does not believe that any Director has served on the Board for a period which could, or could reasonably be perceived to,

materially interfere with the Director’s ability to act in the best interests of the Company. New Directors were most recently appointed to

the Board in 2024 and 2025, and the Board considers that it has an appropriate balance of tenure.

Name of DirectorOriginal

Appointment

Last Reappointed/

Elected

John Journee17 October 201322 November 2024

Dean Hamilton20 April 202024 November 2023

Hamish Rumbold19 November 202528 November 2025

Rachel Taulelei12 February 202122 November 2024

Caroline Rainsford30 August 202228 November 2025

Tony Carter1 May 202422 November 2024

Primary SkillSecondary Skill

Corporate Governance

0-4 years

Director Tenure

4-7 years

7+ years

Principle 3 – Board Committees

“The Board should use committees where this will enhance its effectiveness in key areas, while still retaining Board responsibility.”

The Board has established committees that focus on particular areas of the Board’s responsibilities and together ensure the efficient

performance of the Board, and the achievement of corporate governance outcomes. The committees report to the Board on all material

matters and issues requiring Board decisions. From time to time, the Board may create ad hoc committees to examine specific issues

on its behalf. The Environmental and Social Sustainability Committee was disestablished effective 1 December 2025. The current

committee structure is set out in the table below.

Committee Roles and Responsibilities MembershipMeetings

People and

Remuneration

Committee

Review and make recommendations in relation

to the human resources strategy, the Company’s

remuneration policies and practices, and the

remuneration and performance of the Group

Chief Executive Officer.

Comprised of at least three non-executive

directors, and at least a majority independent

Directors.

Current members:

Rachel Taulelei (Chair), Caroline Rainsford, John

Journee, Hamish Rumbold

At least twice a year

Corporate

Governance and

Nominations

Committee

Ensure a high level of corporate governance

through continuous monitoring of international

corporate governance best practice as

promulgated by the relevant authoritative bodies.

Ensure that the Board is populated with an

appropriate mix of skills and experience among its

members, who collectively provide the diversity of

thought and judgement required.

Comprised of at least three members, at least a

majority of whom are independent Directors.

Current members:

Dean Hamilton (Chair), John Journee, Rachel

Taulelei

At least once a year

Disclosure

Committee

Support the Company in meeting its disclosure

obligations as set out in the NZX Listing Rules,

the Companies Act 1993 and any other applicable

regulations.

Comprised of the Board Chair, Chair of the

Audit and Risk Committee, Group Chief

Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer,

Disclosure Officer and any other Director

appointed by the Board as a member.

Current members:

Dean Hamilton (Chair), John Journee, Group

CEO, CFO and Company Secretary

Held as required

Audit and Risk

Committee

Assist the Board to fulfil its audit and risk

responsibilities.

Review the Company’s annual Sustainability

Report and sustainability-related risks.

Comprised of at least three non-executive

Directors, the majority of whom must be

independent. The Chair will be independent and

may not be the Chair of the Company.

Current members:

Dean Hamilton (Chair), Tony Carter, John

Journee

At least quarterly

Health, Safety

and Wellbeing

Committee

Assist the Board to govern health, safety and

wellbeing.

Comprised of all Directors

Chair: Tony Carter

At the discretion of

the committee Chair

or if requested by any

committee member or

the Group Chief Executive

Officer

Board Meetings and Attendance

The table below outlines the number of meetings of the Board and Board committees during the year ended 2 August 2026 and

Director attendance at those meetings.

DirectorBoardAudit

and Risk

Committee

People and

Remuneration

Committee

Corporate

Governance and

Nominations

Committee

Health, Safety

and Wellbeing

Committee

Disclosure

Committee

Environmental

and Social

Sustainability

Committee

1

Number of

Meetings

146 4 14 7 3

John Journee

2

1462 -4 7 3

Tony Carter 146 - -4 1

3

-

Dean Hamilton

4

12 6 - 13 7 -

Rachel Taulelei 13 2

3

4 -

5

4 3

3

3

Caroline

Rainsford

12

-

4 -4 --

Hamish

Rumbold

6

5 1

3

2-3- -

Dame Joan

Withers

7

732 11 3 2

Robbie Tindall

7

5 -1 1- - 3

1. The Environmental and Social Sustainability Committee was disestablished

effective 1 December 2025

2. Appointed as member of Audit and Risk Committee, People and Remuneration

Committee, and Corporate Governance and Nominations Committee, all effective

28 November 2025

3. Non-committee member in attendance

4. Appointed as Chair of Corporate Governance and Nominations Committee

effective 18 March 2026

5. Appointed as member of Corporate Governance and Nominations Committee

effective 18 March 2026

6. Appointed to the Board effective 19 November 2025 and as member of the

People and Remuneration Committee effective 20 February 2026

7. Resigned from the Board effective 28 November 2025

6968
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report

Corporate Governance

Principle 4 – Reporting and Disclosure

“The Board should demand integrity in financial and non-financial reporting and in the timeliness and balance of corporate disclosures.”

The Board is committed to providing full and timely financial and non-financial information that is accurate, balanced, meaningful and

consistent. As a listed company, keeping the market informed is a key component to ensuring that its securities are valued fairly.

Market Disclosure Policy

The Company has a Market Disclosure Policy that describes the processes designed to ensure that the Company meets its reporting and

disclosure objectives and all disclosure obligations under the NZX Listing Rules.

To assist the Company with its Market Disclosure Policy, the Board has appointed a Disclosure Committee. The Committee is responsible

for making decisions on what should be disclosed publicly under the Market Disclosure Policy. The Company Secretary is the Disclosure

Officer of the Company and has responsibility for ensuring compliance with the continuous disclosure requirements and overseeing and

co-ordinating disclosure to the market.

Publication of Key Governance Documents

The Company publishes its Code of Ethics, Board and Committee Charters, Director Letter of Appointment and key Company policies in

the Corporate Governance section of its website, www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz

Financial Reporting

The Audit and Risk Committee oversees the quality and integrity of external financial reporting including the accuracy, completeness

and timeliness of financial statements and is committed to providing balanced, clear and objective financial reporting. It reviews half-

yearly and annual financial statements and makes recommendations to the Board concerning accounting policies, areas of judgement,

compliance with accounting standards, stock exchange and legal requirements, and the results of the external and internal audit.

Management accountability for the integrity of the Company’s financial reporting is reinforced by certification from the Group CEO

and the Group CFO. The Group CEO and CFO have provided the Board with written confirmation that the Company’s financial report

presents a true and fair view, in all material respects, of the Company’s financial position for the year ended 2 August 2026, and that

operational results are in accordance with relevant accounting standards.

Non-financial Reporting

Under the Group’s integrated reporting framework, we recognise that our networks, customers, communities, suppliers, people and our

environment all contribute to our retail value creation – and our own culture and values.

The Group reports its financial and non-financial results and outcomes annually, including our contribution to the community, key

people metrics including gender and health and safety, as well as our impact on the environment. This year we have reported these

results and outcomes across our Annual Integrated Report and Sustainability Report.

Principle 5 – Remuneration Report

“The remuneration of directors and executives should be transparent, fair and reasonable.”

Group Remuneration Philosophy

The Group’s remuneration policy supports the Group in attracting, retaining and motivating high-calibre diverse team members to

achieve the Company’s business objectives and create shareholder value.

The Group’s remuneration policy is guided by the principles that remuneration practice should::

• Be clearly aligned with the Group’s vision, values and corporate strategy

• Support the attraction, retention and engagement of team members

• Appropriately reflect market practice and conditions

• Recognise individual performance and competency

• Recognise team and company performance in the creation of shareholder value

Executive Leadership Team Remuneration

The Chief Executive Officer and direct reports to the Chief Executive Officer (Executive Leadership Team or ELT) have their remuneration

reviewed annually by the People and Remuneration Committee and from time to time a third-party remuneration consultant is also

used to benchmark the total remuneration packages of the ELT against a peer group of companies. The People and Remuneration

Committee recommends any proposed changes to the Board for approval. The ELT’s remuneration is made up of the following

components:

• Fixed annual base salary

• Short-term incentive based on the Group’s financial targets

• Long-term incentive based on a performance measure over a three-year period.

ELT members are also eligible to receive an employer KiwiSaver contribution of up to a maximum of 3.5% of gross taxable earnings if

they belong to KiwiSaver.

Short-Term Incentives

The Group’s short-term incentive (STI) scheme for the ELT is designed to link at-risk incentive payments to the achievement of the

Group’s desired financial outcomes. The targets are reviewed and set each year. The STI on-target dollar value for each ELT participant

ranges from 40-50% of base salary. The maximum payment under the STI scheme is reviewed and set each year and in FY26 was 120%

of the on-target dollar value. For FY27 the maximum will also be set at 120%.


In FY26, after FY25’s disappointing operating profit of $1.3m, the Group adopted Group Earnings Before Interest and Tax (EBIT) as its

single performance measure for STI to drive a greater focus on operational profit growth. In May 2026, the Board reviewed and adjusted

the Group EBIT target to $20m, to reflect changing market conditions. After payment of STI, the Group EBIT achieved was $22.6m which

entitled STI participants to 120% of their on-target dollar amount. The Board, however, exercised its discretion to pay 100% rather than

120%.


For FY27 the Group has again adopted purely financial

performance measures as part of its ongoing focus on operational

profit with the weighting of each measure dependent on the

participant’s role. For ELT members whose role has a group focus

their performance measure is weighted 100% to Group EBIT. For

ELT members whose role has a brand focus 80% of their STI will

be weighted to Brand EBIT and 20% to Group EBIT. For those

roles with a merchandise focus 40% of their STI will be weighted

to Gross Margin Return on Inventory Investment (GMROI) targets,

40% on Brand EBIT and 20% on Group EBIT. There is a gate

opener to payment in the FY27 scheme of achieving 90% of the

Group NPAT budget.

Long-Term Incentives

Members of the ELT are eligible to participate in the Group’s long-

term incentive (LTI) scheme. The objective of the LTI scheme is to:

• Ensure the LTIs of the eligible ELT members are closely aligned

with shareholder outcomes

• Provide an incentive to eligible ELT members who are considered

to be key to the future success of the Group, to retain the services

of those eligible ELT members in the future

• Provide a longer-term recognition and reward for eligible ELT

members’ contribution to the future success of the Group.

The LTI on-target dollar value for each ELT participant is 40% of

base salary and for the Chief Executive Officer it is 50% of base

salary. Payments under the cash-based schemes have been

capped and that cap is reviewed each year and for the FY26

scheme the cap was 150% of the on-target dollar value.


The FY24 LTI scheme’s performance period ended on 31 July 2026

and was a cash-settled scheme, and the performance target was

absolute Total Shareholder Return (TSR) against the Group’s cost

of equity plus 1% over a three-year performance period. There

were only three participants from the existing ELT in that scheme,

and the performance hurdle was not achieved and no payment

was made. One other executive had previously been granted a

long-term retention incentive equivalent to 100% of their LTI

target amount and was awarded the payment which will be paid

in FY27.

Directors’ Remuneration

The current Directors’ fee pool limit is $990,000, which was

approved by the shareholders at the 26 November 2021 Annual

Shareholders’ Meeting. Fees are paid for Board and committee

roles as indicated below. Directors are reimbursed for reasonable

travel and other costs associated with fulfilling their role. The

Chair does not receive additional fees for membership of Board

committees.

Board/Committee NamePositionFees (Per Annum)

Board of DirectorsChair

$200,000

1

Member

$87,000

Audit and Risk CommitteeChair

$27,500

Member

$10,000

People and Remuneration

Committee

Chair

$25,000

Member

$6,600

Health, Safety and Wellbeing

Committee

Chair

$20,000

Member-

Corporate Governance and

Nominations Committee

Chair-

Member-

Disclosure CommitteeChair-

Member-

Environmental and Social

Sustainability Committee

2


Chair

$20,000

Member

$6,000

1. Includes attendance at committee meetings. Chair fee was $182,600 per annum

until 28 November 2025

2. The Environmental and Social Sustainability Committee was disestablished

effective 1 December 2025

7170
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report

Directors’ Remuneration FY26

The fees paid to non-executive Directors for services in their capacity as Directors during the year ended 2 August 2026, totalling

$914,709, were paid as set out below.

Name of Director

Board

Fees

Audit

and Risk

Committee

People and

Remuneration

Committee

Corporate

Governance

and Nominations

Committee

Disclosure

Committee

Health, Safety

and Wellbeing

Committee

Environmental

and Social

Sustainability

Committee

3

Shares

and Other

Payments

or Benefits

Total

Individual

Remuneration

John Journee

1

(Director until 28

November 2025,

then Chair)

$162,333-

(member from 28

November 2025)

-

(member from 28

November 2025)

-

(member from 28

November 2025)

-

(member)

-

(member)

$2,200

(member)

$148,000

4

$312,533

Tony Carter

$87,000$10,000

(member)

---$20,000

(Chair)

--$117,000

Dean Hamilton

$87,000$27,500

(Chair)

--

(member until 18

March 2026, then

Chair)

-

(Chair)

-

(member)

--$114,500

Caroline Rainsford

$87,000-$6,600

(member)

---

(member)

--$93,600

Rachel Taulelei

$87,000-$25,000

(Chair)

-

(member from 18

March 2026)

--

(member)

$2,750

(member)

-$114,750

Hamish Rumbold

2

$60,292-$3,300

(member from 20

February 2026)

---

(member)

--$63,592

Dame Joan Withers

1

(Chair until 28

November 2025)

$60,867-

(member until 28

November 2025)

-

(member until 28

November 2025)

-

(Chair until 28

November 2025)

-

(member until 28

November 2025)

-

(member until 28

November 2025)

-

(member until 28

November 2025)

-$60,867

Robbie Tindall

1

$29,000-$2,200

(member until 28

November 2025)

-

(member until 28

November 2025)

--

(member until 28

November 2025)

$6,667

(Chair until 28

November 2025)

-$37,867

1. On 28 November 2025, Dame Joan Withers and Robbie Tindall resigned as Directors, John Journee succeeded Dame Joan Withers as Chair of the Board, and John

Journee became a member of the Audit and Risk Committee, the People and Remuneration Committee, the Corporate Governance and Nominations Committee and

the Health, Safety and Wellbeing Committee. These Directors were paid in full for November on the basis of their positions at the start of that month, and were paid

under the new structure from December 2025.

2. Hamish Rumbold was appointed as a Director as of 19 November 2025 and as a member of the People and Remuneration Committee as of 20 February 2026. Mr

Rumbold was paid in full for these positions for November 2025 and February 2026.

3. The Environmental and Social Sustainability Committee was disestablished effective 1 December 2025.

4. John Journee received additional fees of $20,000 (excl. GST) in relation to supporting the transition to Mark Stirton as incoming CEO, and additional fees of $128,000

(excl. GST) for consultancy services in relation to a project being considered by the Company.

Remuneration Report

1. Chief Executive Officer remuneration ($000s)

Base PackagePay for Performance

Mark StirtonSalaryTaxable

Benefits

SubtotalSTILTISubtotalTotal Remuneration

Paid in FY261,200491,249375--1,624

Earned in

FY26

1,200541,254600--1,854

Explanation of the above remuneration packages:

1. The $375,000 STI paid to Mark Stirton in FY26 related to the FY25 financial year and to his role as Group Chief Financial Officer and was a guaranteed short-term

retention incentive.

2. The $600,000 STI earned by Mark Stirton in FY26 in his role as Group Chief Executive Officer will be paid in FY27 and represented a 100% payment of his on-

target dollar amount for achieving the Group EBIT performance measure for FY26. For FY26 Mark Stirton was guaranteed 50% of his on target STI dollar amount

and half of the FY26 STI guarantee, on an after-tax basis, was required to be invested in Company shares and held for the duration of Mark Stirton’s tenure as

Group Chief Executive Officer.

3. No LTI vested in FY26.

2. Five-year summary of CEO remuneration ($000s) paid in the financial year

Year Group CEO Total Earnings PaidBase Taxable Benefits STISTI as % of

Maximum

LTIAdditional

Payment

2026 Mark Stirton 1,624 1,200 49 375

2025 John Journee 1,737 1,603 50 - - - 84

2024 John Journee 332 323 9 - - - -

2024 Nick Grayston 4,220 1,354 123 567 - - 2,176

2023 Nick Grayston 2,793 1,588 81 189 20% 935 189

Explanation of the above items:

1. John Journee joined the Group in May 2024 as Interim Group Chief Executive Officer. John Journee’s remuneration was solely fixed remuneration with no STI

or LTI available. John Journee stepped down on 31 July 2025, and Mark Stirton commenced as the new Group Chief Executive Officer on 1 August 2025.

2. The actual remuneration paid includes holiday pay paid as per New Zealand legislation.

3. Taxable benefits are the value of employer KiwiSaver contributions.

4. The $84,000 additional payment to John Journee in FY25 was the payout of holiday pay at the end of John Journee’s employment.

Corporate Governance

3. Breakdown of Mark Stirton’s Group Chief Executive Officer Remuneration Package Structure (2026) ($000s)

Remuneration ComponentDescriptionTarget Value

Fixed RemunerationAnnual Base Salary1,200

KiwiSaver annualised on base 36

Short-Term Incentives (STI) Target value of STI 600

Long-term Incentives (LTI) Target value of LTI 600

Annual Total Package Annual Total Package at Target 2,436

4. Breakdown of Mark Stirton’s Group Chief Executive Officer’s Potential Remuneration and Pay for Performance (2027) ($000s)

Remuneration ComponentDescriptionAt TargetAt Maximum

Fixed RemunerationAnnual Base Salary1,3001,300

KiwiSaver annualised45.545.5

Short-Term Incentives (STI) Cash-based STI shown at on target and at maximum (120%)650780

Long-term Incentives (LTI) Under review for FY27, but based on FY26 would be a

maximum of 150%

650975

Annual Total Package Annual Total Fixed plus Incentive Remuneration 2,6463,101

5. Mark Stirton’s LTI Schemes

Year Invited% of salarySettlementPerformance PeriodMeasure

FY25*40%CashAugust 2024 to July 2027 Absolute TSR against the Company’s cost of equity plus 1%

over a three-year performance period

FY2650%CashAugust 2025 to July 2028 Absolute TSR against the Company’s cost of equity plus 1%

over a three-year performance period

FY2750%Under ReviewAugust 2026 to July 2029 Under Review

* This LTI grant was awarded while Mark Stirton was the Group Chief Financial Officer

6. Five-year summary of Total Shareholder Return (TSR) Performance

FY22FY23FY24

FY25

FY26

5.0%

0.0%

-5.0%

-10.0%

-15.0%

-20.0%

-25.0%

-30.0%

-35.0%

-40.0%

-45.0%

2.5%

-41.5%-41.5%

-30.1%

-13.9%

7. Required disclosures per guidelines

DescriptionPerformance Measures

TSR MethodologyTotal Shareholder Return has been calculated as the movement in the share price during the period plus

any dividends paid.

Board Discretion Discretion exercised in reduction of STI payout for FY26 from 120% to 100%.

Omissions No information has been omitted relating to CEO remuneration.

Any other items There are no other items payable to the CEO that have not been disclosed.

Benefits There are no benefits attributable to the CEO due to any loans made.

WithholdingsNo part of the CEO remuneration has been withheld for any purpose.

Related Parties No related parties are involved with the CEO remuneration.

The ratio of CEO total remuneration to the median of The Warehouse Group employee total remuneration paid in FY26 is 29:1. This ratio

reflects the fact that approximately 80% of The Warehouse Group’s 10,000 team members are employed in its stores and distribution

centres and are paid retail market rates for those roles.

7372
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report

Team Members’ Remuneration

Grouped below, in accordance with section 211(1)(g) of the Companies Act 1993, are the number of Team Members or former Team

Members, not being Directors or former Directors, who received remuneration and other benefits valued at, or exceeding $100,000,

during the accounting period. Remuneration includes redundancy payments and termination payments made during the year to Team

Members whose remuneration would not otherwise have been included in the table reported below.

Corporate Governance

Remuneration

($000)

Number of Team

Members

100 - 110122

110 - 12082

120 - 13092

130 - 14078

140 - 15074

150 - 16036

160 - 17022

170 - 18026

180 - 19030

190 - 20024

200 - 21019

210 - 22014

220 - 2308

Remuneration

($000)

Number of Team

Members

230 - 2408

240 - 2508

250 - 2604

260 - 2703

270 - 2803

280 - 2905

300 - 3102

310 - 3203

330 - 3402

350 - 3601

370 - 3801

380 - 3901

400 - 4102

Remuneration

($000)

Number of Team

Members

410 - 4202

420 - 4301

440 - 4501

500 - 5101

510 - 5201

520 - 5303

580 - 5901

670 - 6801

1,000 - 1,0101

1,160 - 1,1701

1,620 - 1,6301

Principle 7 – Auditors

“The Board should ensure the quality and independence of the

external audit process.”

Approach to Audit Governance

The independence of the external auditor is of particular

importance to shareholders and the Board. The Audit and Risk

Committee is responsible for overseeing the external audit of the

Company. Accordingly, it monitors developments in the areas of

audit to ensure its policies and practices are consistent with best

practice in these areas.

The Board has adopted a policy on audit independence, the key

elements of which are:

• The external auditor must remain independent of the Company at

all times and must comply with all relevant ethical requirements

and professional standards regarding independence

• The external auditor must monitor its independence and annually

report to the Board that it has remained independent

• The audit firm is permitted to provide certain non-audit services,

set out in the Audit and Risk Committee Charter, that are

not considered to be in conflict with the preservation of the

independence of the auditor

• The Audit and Risk Committee must approve all non-audit work

assignments that are awarded to an external auditor, and the

value of non-audit work must be reported at every Board meeting.

Engagement of the External Auditor

PwC was appointed by the Company’s shareholders at the

2004 Annual Shareholders’ Meeting in accordance with the

provisions of the Companies Act 1993 (Act). PwC is automatically

reappointed as auditor under section 207T of the Act.

Attendance at the Annual Shareholders’ Meeting

PwC, as auditor of the 2026 Financial Statements, has been

invited to attend this year’s Annual Shareholders’ Meeting and

will be available to answer questions about the conduct of the

audit, preparation and content of the auditor’s report, accounting

policies adopted by the Company and the independence of the

auditor in relation to the conduct of the audit.

The Company’s corporate legal advisors, Russell McVeagh, will also

attend the Annual Shareholders’ Meeting.

Internal Audit

The Company has an internal audit function that is independent

of the Company’s external auditors. The internal audit function of

the Company is undertaken by the Company’s own internal audit

team with the assistance of a co-source internal audit partner,

KPMG. The internal audit team reports to, and is directed by, the

Audit and Risk Committee.

Each year, the internal audit programme is approved by the Audit

and Risk Committee. The programme of audit work considers

significant areas of business risk in the Company and is developed

following discussions with Management, review of business

changes and major projects that are planned or currently under

way, and consideration of strategic risks relevant to the Company.

The role of internal audit is to:

• Evaluate the design and operating effectiveness of controls

governing key operations, processes and business risks

• Provide the Board with an assessment, independent of Management,

as to the adequacy of those internal operating and financial controls

• Assist the Board in meeting its corporate governance and

regulatory responsibilities.

Principle 8 – Shareholder Rights and

Relations

“The Board should respect the rights of shareholders and foster

constructive relationships with shareholders that encourage them

to engage with the issuer.”

The Company’s website contains a comprehensive set of investor-

related material and data, including key NZX disclosures and

media releases, interim and annual reports, shareholder meeting

materials and the Company’s governance charters and policies.

The Company has an investor relations programme which

includes communication through:

• Periodic and continuous disclosure to the NZX

• Annual reports

• Sustainability reports

• The Annual Shareholders’ Meeting

• The Company’s website, which includes financial and operational

information, and key corporate governance information

• Analyst and investor briefings and roadshows.

Engagement with Investors

The Company values its dialogue with strategic stakeholders,

institutional and retail investors, and research analysts, and

believes effective engagement benefits both the Company and

investors. Annual Shareholders’ Meetings, analyst and investor

briefings and roadshows provide an important opportunity for

this dialogue. Shareholders also have the opportunity to submit

questions and comments through investors@thewarehouse.co.nz.

Annual Shareholders’ Meeting (ASM)

The ASM provides an opportunity for Directors, the Group CEO,

the executive leadership team, and the Company’s external

auditor to meet shareholders and answer any questions they

may have. The ASM is held at a convenient time and location. The

2025 ASM was held on 28 November 2025. The Notice of Annual

Shareholders’ Meeting was published on 31 October 2025.

In accordance with the Companies Act 1993 and NZX Listing

Rules, the Company refers any significant matters to shareholders

for approval at the ASM, and shareholders are given the

opportunity to vote by proxy ahead of the meeting or by polling if

attending the meeting in person or online.

Electronic Communication

The Company continues to prioritise electronic reporting as

part of its commitment to cost effectiveness and minimising

environmental impact. Shareholders can request a copy of the

Annual Report to be sent to them free of charge by contacting

MUFG Pension & Market Services, the Company’s share registrar.

Shareholders are encouraged to provide their email addresses

to MUFG Pension & Market Services to enable them to receive all

shareholder materials electronically.

MUFG Pension & Market Services

Telephone: +64 9 375 5998

Email: enquiries.nz@cm.mpms.mufg.com

Principle 6 – Risk Management

“Directors should have a sound understanding of the material risks faced by the issuer and how to manage them. The Board should

regularly verify that the issuer has appropriate processes that identify and manage potential and material risks.”

Risk Management Framework

Risk is the chance of something happening that will have an impact on business objectives. Having established an acceptable risk

tolerance, the Company’s approach is to identify, analyse, evaluate and appropriately manage risk in the business.

Material Risks Identified

Information on material risks the Company faces and how they are managed is set out on pages 20 to 22 of this Annual Report.

Risk Management Roles and Responsibilities

The Board is responsible for reviewing and approving the Company’s risk management strategy. The Board delegates day-to-day

management of risk to the Group CEO, who may further delegate such responsibilities to executive and other officers. Inherent in this

delegation is the belief that responsibility for managing risks in the business is the domain of the business unit.

Risk Monitoring and Evaluation

While the Board is ultimately responsible for the risk management of the Company, the Audit and Risk Committee reviews the reports

of Management and the external and internal auditors on the effectiveness of systems for internal control, financial reporting and

risk management. To assist in discharging this responsibility, the Board has in place a number of strategies designed to safeguard the

Company’s assets and interests and ensure the integrity of reporting. These reports include quarterly reviews of store audit results and

non-store internal audit findings, and half-yearly reviews of key enterprise risks.

Health and Safety

The Company’s approach and process on health and safety matters are set out on page 16 of The Warehouse Group Sustainability Report

which can be found on its website www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz

Indemnity and Insurance

In accordance with section 162 of the Companies Act 1993 and the Constitution of the Company, the Company has provided insurance

for, and indemnities to, Directors and certain employees of the Company and its subsidiaries for losses from actions undertaken in the

course of their legitimate duties.

7574
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report

Corporate Governance

Celebrating Diversity and Inclusion

The Company values diversity, and the provision of equal opportunities for all employees and those looking to join the Company is

fundamental to the way we operate as a business.


For the year ended 2 August 2026 the Board is satisfied that the Company achieved its objective in relation to gender pay equity. The

Company did not achieve its objective of female representation in senior leadership. The Company intends to undertake a review of its

diversity and inclusion objectives in FY27, including initiatives required to achieve those objectives.


The Group strives to create a workplace where our people can bring their whole selves to work. Not only is this the right thing to do for

our team members, we also believe that a diverse team and an inclusive workplace leads to more innovation, better decision-making,

more opportunities for all our people and the communities in which we operate, and better performance outcomes for the Company.

That is why we’re committed to continuously identifying ways we can improve diversity and inclusivity.

Actual as at 2 August 2026 (based on employee headcount)

Focus Area: Gender

ObjectiveImprove representation of women at senior levels of business

Target20252026

50% of senior

leadership roles

held by women

Female representation

by role

FemaleMaleGender

diverse/

not

disclosed

Total % of

female

FemaleMaleGender

diverse/

not

disclosed

Total % of

female

Board  34-742.9%24633.3%

Executives  25-728.6%2101216.7%

Direct report to executive

team  

1718-3548.6%22305242.3%

Total Leadership1923-4245.2%2440-6437.5%

Other 5,4854,052109,54757.5%5,3673,86099,23658.1%

Total Employees (excluding

Board)

5,5044,075109,58957.4%5,3913,90099,30058.0%

Female representation by

employee status

FemaleMaleGender

diverse/

not

disclosed

Total % of

female

FemaleMaleGender

diverse/

not

disclosed

Total % of

female

Permanent 4,566 3,349 8 7,923 57.6% 4,340 3,171 6 7,517 57.7%

Fixed Term 72 37 109 66.1% 67 53 1 121 55.4%

Casual 866 689 2 1,557 55.6% 984 676 2 1,662 59.2%

Female representation by

full/part-time employment

FemaleMaleGender

diverse/

not

disclosed

Total % of

female

FemaleMaleGender

diverse/

not

disclosed

Total % of

female

Full-time 2,579 2,199 3 4,781 53.9% 2,371 2,104 4 4,479 52.9%

Part-time 2,059 1,187 5 3,251 63.3% 2,036 1,120 3 3,159 64.5%

Casual 866 689 2 1,557 55.6% 984 676 2 1,662 59.2%

100% Gender pay

equity (undisclosed

gender data is not

included)

CategoryNumber of employees

in each category

Median pay ratioMedian

gender

pay gap

Number of employees

in each category

Median pay ratioMedian

gender

pay gap

The Warehouse Group

- Total 

9,578 100.0%0.0% 9,291100.0%0.0%

Leadership  3483.0%17.0%6473.4%26.6%

SSO 87485.0%15.0%74395.4%4.6%

Stores  8,212100.0%0.0%7,829100.0%0.0%

Distribution Centres  45897.0%3.0%65596.1%3.9%

Focus Area: Age

20252026

Age RepresentationUnder 30 years old30-50 years oldOver 50 years oldUnder 30 years old30-50 years oldOver 50 years old

#%#%#%#%#%#%

Board - - 3 37.5% 5 62.5% 2 33.3% 4 66.7%

Executives   - - 4 57.1% 3 42.9% 7 58.3% 5 41.7%

Direct report to executive team   - - 21 60.0% 14 40.0% 1 1.9% 33 63.5% 18 34.6%

Other 4,427 46.4% 3,207 33.6% 1,908 20.0% 4,166 45.1% 3,254 35.2% 1,814 19.6%

Total (106 were non-disclosed) 4,427 46.2% 3,235 33.7% 1,930 20.1% 4,167 44.8% 3,296 35.4% 1,841 19.8%

7776
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report

Statutory Disclosures

Disclosures of Interests by Directors

General disclosures

The following are particulars of general disclosures of interest given by the Directors of The Warehouse Group Limited pursuant to

section 140(2) of the Companies Act 1993 during FY26.


DirectorEntityInterest

John JourneeFarmlands Society

Colonial Motor Company Limited

CMC Workplace Savings Scheme Trustee Limited

Vanishing Point Limited

Data Insights Group Limited

Director and Shareholder

Director and Shareholder

Director

Director and Shareholder

Advisory Board Member and Shareholder

Dean HamiltonFulton Hogan Limited

Auckland International Airport Limited

Tappenden Holdings Limited

Ryman Healthcare Limited

Chair and Shareholder

Director and Shareholder

Director

Chair and Shareholder

Antony CarterThe Interiors Group HoldCo Limited

Skin Institute Holding Company Limited

Datacom Group Limited

TR Group Limited

My Food Bag Group Limited

Ravensdown Limited

Sanford Limited

Capital Solutions Limited

Capital Training Limited

Loughborough Investments Limited

Maurice Carter Charitable Trust

Tony and Frances Carter Family Trust

Antony Carter Family Trust No 2

Chair

Chair

Chair

Chair

Chair

Director

Director

Board Advisor

Advisor

Director and Shareholder

Trustee

Trustee

Trustee

Caroline RainsfordGoogle New Zealand

Otereti Limited

Auckland Art Gallery Toi o Tāmaki

2

Country Director New Zealand

Director

Advisory Committee Member

Hamish RumboldRyman Healthcare Limited

Perigee HoldCo Limited (trading as OrbitRemit)

Livestock Improvement Corporation Limited

House of Travel Holdings Limited

Capio(b) Limited

Antler Trust

Antler Investment Trust

Evolution Healthcare

New Zealand Superfund

Constantinople

Director

Chair

Director

Director

Director and Shareholder

Trustee

Trustee

Advisor

Technology Advisor

Advisor

Rachel TauleleiWellington International Airport Limited

Oho 2021 Limited

ANZCO Foods Limited

CWBG Limited

Tokomanawa Queens Foundation

NZ Rugby Appointments and Remuneration Panel

Huia Publishing

Mercury NZ Limited

Fonterra Sustainability Panel

2

Sealord Group Limited

2

Kura Limited

2

Aotearoa Fisheries Limited t/a Moana New Zealand

2

Wellington Regional Stadium Trust

2

Director

Director and Shareholder

Director

Director and Shareholder

Chair

Chair

Advisory Board Member

Director

Chair

Director

Director

Director and Chair

Chair

Dame Joan Withers

1

ANZ Bank New Zealand Limited

On Being Bold Limited

Sky Network Television Limited

Sweet Louise Foundation

Origin Energy Limited

Director

Director

Director

Trustee

Director

Robert Tindall

1

The Tindall Foundation

Finn Lowery Foundation

Foundation Services Limited

K One W One Limited and related companies

Trustee

Trustee

Director

Director

1. Ceased to be a director on 28 November 2025. Disclosures detailed are as at this date.

2. No longer an interest as at 2 August 2026.

As at 2 August 2026 Directors, or entities related to them, held relevant interests (as defined in the Financial Markets Conduct Act 2013)

in the Company shares as follows:

Beneficial InterestBeneficial InterestNon-beneficial InterestNon-beneficial Interest

2026202520262025

A Carter

70,00040,000

D Hamilton

1

23,50023,5001,493,0571,493,057

J Journee

2

172,000172,000 1,493,057

1. Relevant interest as shareholder of The Warehouse Management Trustee Company Limited and The Warehouse Management Trustee Company No. 2 Limited, which

each hold shares for the purposes of employee incentive schemes.

2.


Relevant interest (as shareholder of The Warehouse Management Trustee Company Limited and The Warehouse Management Trustee Company No. 2 Limited, which

each hold shares for the purposes of employee incentive schemes) transferred from Dame Joan Withers to John Journee on 28 November 2025.

Share Dealings by Directors

During the financial year, the Directors disclosed in respect of section 148(2) of the Companies Act 1993 that they acquired or

disposed of a relevant interest in shares as follows:

Share TransactionNature of relevant

interest

Date of

Transaction

Number of Ordinary Shares

Acquired/(Disposed of)

Consideration

Dame J WithersNon-beneficial owner28 November

2025

(1,015,875)

Off-market transfer of 67% of the shares

in The Warehouse Management Trustee

Company Limited (which holds shares in the

Company for the purpose of the employee

incentive scheme)

J JourneeNon-beneficial owner28 November

2025

1,015,875

Off-market acquisition of 67% of the shares

in The Warehouse Management Trustee

Company Limited (which holds shares in the

Company for the purpose of the employee

incentive scheme)

Dame J WithersNon-beneficial owner28 November

2025

(477,182)

Off-market transfer of 66% of the shares

in The Warehouse Management Trustee

Company No. 2 Limited (which holds shares

in the Company for the purpose of the

employee incentive scheme)

J JourneeNon-beneficial owner28 November

2025

477,182

Off-market acquisition of 66% of the shares

in The Warehouse Management Trustee

Company No. 2 Limited (which holds shares

in the Company for the purpose of the

employee incentive scheme)

A CarterBeneficial owner31 March 2026

9,492

On-market purchase of ordinary shares at a

price of $0.6567 per share

A CarterBeneficial owner1 April 2026

20,508

On-market purchase of ordinary shares at a

price of $0.6609 per share

Twenty Largest Registered Shareholders as at 2 August 2026

NameNumber of Ordinary SharesPercentage of Ordinary Shares

Sir Stephen Robert Tindall

93,687,09627.01

The Tindall Foundation Inc

73,920,49621.31

James Pascoe Investments Limited

69,333,94019.99

New Zealand Superannuation Fund Nominees Limited

11,892,1863.43

New Zealand Depository Nominee

8,867,7892.56

Stephen Robert Tindall & John Richard Avery & Brian Mayo Smith

3,778,1491.09

Robert George Tindall & Stephen Robert Tindall & Pupuke Trustee Limited

3,455,1031.00

ASB Nominees Limited

3,094,1000.89

Forsyth Barr Custodians Limited

2,284,6720.66

David George Harper & Karen Elizabeth Harper

2,070,0000.60

Accident Compensation Corporation

1,806,0870.52

Paul Hughes & Tajrena Alexi & CR Trustees Limited

1,750,0000.50

Custodial Services Limited

1,648,9780.48

Citibank Nominees (NZ) Ltd

1,539,6280.44

Rainer Huebner & Shanti Huebner

1,215,0000.35

Peter Duncan Garvan

925,5490.27

Hsu Cheng Yang

850,0000.25

Stephen Robert Tindall & John Richard Avery & Brian Mayo Smith

752,7980.22

The Warehouse Management Trustee Company Limited

667,1740.19

Guobang Liu

641,3210.18

Total

284,180,06681.94

Note: The shareholding of New Zealand Central Securities Depository Limited (NZCSD) has been reallocated to the applicable members of NZCSD.

7978
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report

Distribution of Shareholders as at 2 August 2026

Size of ShareholdingNumber of

Shareholders

PercentageNumber of SharesPercentage

1 to 1,000 3,878 43.54% 2,012,603 0.58%

1,001 to 5,000 3,042 34.15% 7,865,737 2.27%

5,001 to 10,000 887 9.96% 6,806,911 1.96%

10,001 to 100,000 993 11.15% 26,192,202 7.55%

100,001 to 500,000 85 0.95% 16,695,169 4.81%

500,001 and Over 22 0.25% 287,270,498 82.83%

Total 8,907 100% 346,843,120 100%

Substantial Product Holders

According to notices given to the Company under the Financial Markets Conduct Act 2013, as at 2 August 2026, the substantial product

holders in the Company and their relevant interests are noted below:

Relevant Interest (Ordinary Shares)Percentage

Stephen Robert Tindall93,687,09627.01

The Tindall Foundation Inc73,920,49621.31

James Pascoe Investments Limited69,333,94019.99

Statutory Disclosures

Subsidiary Company Directors

The following people held office as Directors of subsidiary companies at 2 August 2026. Those who retired during the year are indicated

with an (R).

CompanyDirectors

1-Day Liquor Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)

Altitude NZ Limited (previously Torpedo 7 Limited) M Stirton, S Knight, J Journee (R)

Bond and Bond Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)

Boye Developments Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)

Chocolateworks NZ Limited A Razey, J Andersen, C Cole, S Roest, D Watts, J Hempstead (R)

Eldamos Investments Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)

Eldamos Nominees Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)

Farran (Nine) Limited S Knight, M Davey, G Helsby, G Lane, M Stirton (R)

Lincoln West Limited S Knight, M Davey, G Helsby, G Lane, M Stirton (R)

Noel Leeming Finance Limited B Moors

Noel Leeming Financial Services Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)

Noel Leeming Furniture Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)

Noel Leeming Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)

The Book Depot Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)

The Warehouse Card Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)

The Warehouse Group Support Services Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)

The Warehouse Investments Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)

The Warehouse Limited M Stirton, S Knight, J Journee (R)

The Warehouse Management Trustee Company Limited D Hamilton, J Journee, Dame J Withers (R)

The Warehouse Management Trustee Company No.2 Limited D Hamilton, J Journee, Dame J Withers (R)

The Warehouse Nominees Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)

The Warehouse Planit Trustees Limited Dame J Withers, J Journee

The Warehouse (Shanghai) Trading Company Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Pook, T Benyon (R), M Anderton (R)

TWGI Operations Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)

TWGA Pty Ltd I McGill, B Moors

TW House Sourcing Private Limited (India) C Srinivasan, B Moors, P Gupta, M Anderton (R)

TWL Australia Pty Limited I McGill, B Moors

TWP No.1 Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)

TWP No.4 Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)

TWP No.5 Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)

Warehouse Stationery Limited B Moors

8180
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report

Stock Exchange Listing

The ordinary shares of The Warehouse Group Limited are listed on

the New Zealand Exchange (NZX).

Ordinary Shares

The total number of voting securities of the Company on issue on

2 August 2026 was 346,843,120 fully paid ordinary shares.

Holders of each class of equity security as at 2 August 2026

Class of Equity

Security

Number of Holders Number of Shares or

Rights

Ordinary Shares 8,907 346,843,120

Rights Attaching To Shares

Clauses 20-22 of the Company’s Constitution set out the voting

rights of shareholders. Ordinary shares in the Company each carry

a right to vote on a poll at any general meeting of shareholders on

any resolution. Holders of ordinary shares may vote at a meeting

in person, or by proxy, representative or attorney. Voting may

be conducted by voice, a show of hands or a poll. Each of the

Company’s ordinary shares entitles the holder to one vote.

Escrow

Apart from the shares held under the Staff Purchase Plan, the

Company has no securities subject to an escrow agreement.

Donations

In accordance with section 211(1)(h) of the Companies Act 1993,

the Company records that it donated $46,000 (2025: $18,000)

to various charities during the year. In line with Board policy, no

political contributions were made during the year.

Dividends on Ordinary Shares

The Group’s current Dividend Policy was approved by the Board

in March 2021. The Group’s Dividend Policy is to distribute at least

70% of the Group’s full-year adjusted net profit, at the discretion

of the Board and subject to trading performance, market

conditions and liquidity requirements.

The Board did not declare a final dividend for the financial year

ended 2 August 2026.

Dividends20262025202420232022

Interim--5.0-10.0

Special-----

Final---8.010.0

Total--5.08.020.0

Auditor

PricewaterhouseCoopers has continued to act as auditor of

the Company and has undertaken the audit of the financial

statements for the year ended 2 August 2026.

Disciplinary Action

NZX has not taken any disciplinary action against the Company

during the period under review.

NZX Waivers

No waivers have been granted and published by NZX or relied

upon by the Company in the 12 months immediately preceding

The Warehouse Group Limited’s balance date.

Directory
Board of Directors

John Journee (Chair)

Rachel Taulelei

Antony (Tony) Carter

Dean Hamilton

Caroline Rainsford

Hamish Rumbold

Group Chief Executive Officer

Mark Stirton

Group Chief Financial Officer

Stefan Knight

Company Secretary

Silv Roest

Place of Business

26 The Warehouse Way

Northcote, Auckland 0627

PO Box 33470, Takapuna

Auckland 0740, New Zealand

Telephone: +64 9 489 7000

Facsimile: +64 9 489 7444

Website: www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz

Registered Office

26 The Warehouse Way

Northcote, Auckland 0627

New Zealand

New Zealand Business Number

(NZBN)

New Zealand Incorporation:

9429038766633

Auditor

PricewaterhouseCoopers

Private Bag 92162

Auckland 1142, New Zealand

Stock Exchange Listing

NZX trading code: WHS

Share Registrar

MUFG Pension & Market Services

(MPMS)

Level 30, PwC Tower, 15 Customs Street West

Auckland 1010

Phone: +64 (09) 375 5998

Email: enquiries.nz@cm.mpms.mufg.com

Website: nz.investorcentre.mpms.mufg.com

Shareholder Enquiries

If you have any general shareholder enquiries,

including questions or comments on this Report,

please contact investors@thewarehouse.co.nz.

Shareholders with enquiries regarding share

transactions, change of address, or dividend

payments should contact the Share Registrar,

per contact details above. Shareholdings can be

managed electronically by using MUFG’s secure

website, www.nz.investorcentre.mpms.mufg.

com

8382

The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Directory

thewarehousegroup.co.nz
To build exceptional

retail brands

that customers love, our team take

pride in, and deliver sustainable

shareholder returns

---

Results for announcement to the market
Name of issuer The Warehouse Group Limited

Reporting Period 52 weeks to 2 August 2026

Previous Reporting Period 53 weeks to 3 August 2025

Currency New Zealand dollars

$3,027,587

$3,027,587

$11,234

$11,234

Final Dividend

Record Date Not Applicable

Dividend Payment Date Not Applicable

Contact phone number

Contact email address Stefan.Knight@twgroup.co.nz

Date of release through MAP

Audited financial statements accompany this announcement.

Revenue from continuing

operations

down (1.9)%

The Warehouse Group Limited

Results for announcement (for Equity and Debt Security issuer)

Amount (000s)Percentage change

Total Revenue down (1.9)%

Net profit/(loss) from

continuing operations

up 506.4 %

Total net profit/(loss) up 506.4 %

Amount per Quoted Equity

Security

Not Applicable

Imputed amount per

Quoted Equity Security

Not Applicable

Current periodPrior comparable period

Net tangible assets per

Quoted Equity Security (in dollars

and cents per security)

$0.560 (02 August 2026) $0.464 (03 August 2025)

A brief explanation of any of

the figures above necessary

to enable the figures to be

understood

The Annual Report, investor presentation and media release which accompany

this announcement, provide information and commentary to explain the

financial performance of the Group for the 52 week period ended 2 August

2026.

30 September 2026

Authority for this announcement

Name of person authorised to

make this announcement

Stefan Knight (Group Chief Financial Officer)

Contact person for this

announcement

Stefan Knight (Group Chief Financial Officer)

(09) 489 7000

---

THE WAREHOUSE GROUP
Sustainability

Report

For the reporting period 4 August 2025 to 2 August 2026

Table of Contents
Introduction 3

Chair’s Introduction 4

CEO’s Introduction 5

2026 at a Glance 6

Our Approach to Sustainability 7

About The Warehouse Group 8

Our Sustainable Living Plan 9

Our People 14

Growing Our People and Culture 15

Supporting Our People to Thrive 16

Our Relationships 17

Our Communities 18

Trading Ethically and Responsibly 20

Our Climate Transition and Emissions 24

Our Climate Transition and Emissions 25

Transition Planning 25

Metrics and Targets 27

Our Approach to Sustainability Governance and Risk

Management 31

The Role of our Board 32

The Role of our Management Team 32

Managing Sustainability-related Risks 32

Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Disclosures 33

Appendices 44

Appendix 1 – Greenhouse Gas Emissions Inventory Criteria 45

Appendix 2 – Initiatives and Associations 52

Appendix 3 – Independent Limited Assurance Report 53

About this report

This report covers The Warehouse Group’s environmental and social sustainability

performance for the 52-week period 4 August 2025 to 2 August 2026. It covers the same

entities as our FY26 Annual Report, available at www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/investor-

centre/company-reports. References to “we”, “our”, or “us” are references to the Group.

This year’s report does not include climate statements prepared under the Aotearoa New

Zealand Climate Standards. This follows the Government’s announcement in late 2025

of proposed changes to the regime, which will (once legislation is passed) mean that The

Warehouse Group is no longer a climate reporting entity. In October 2025, the Financial

Markets Authority (FMA) announced “no action” relief for entities that are climate reporting

entities under existing legislation but are expecting their climate reporting obligations to

cease once legislation is passed. This no action relief means that those entities will face no

action from the FMA for failing to meet climate reporting obligations under Part 7A of the

Financial Markets Conduct Act 2013 for their 2025/26 reporting period. We are relying on

the “no action” relief for this reporting period. Our climate transition plan, greenhouse gas

emissions (GHG) and targets, and approach to governance and risk management are covered

on pages 25–32. Our GHG emissions, energy and waste metrics have been independently

assured. This report is not a climate statement that complies with the Aotearoa New Zealand

Climate Standards.

Unless stated otherwise, all data is for the year ended 2 August 2026. Figures may be

rounded, so totals and percentages may not add up exactly. Target years refer to the end of

the relevant financial year unless otherwise stated.

Date published

This report was published on 30 September 2026 and is available on the Group’s website at

https://www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/investor-centre/company-reports.

Enquiries

If you have any questions or comments regarding this report, please contact investors@

thewarehouse.co.nz.

Introduction

Chair’s Introduction
As a Board, we’ve always believed doing the right thing

and doing good business are the same thing. This Group

was striving to be affordably sustainable, making the right

choice the best-value choice, decades before either was

expected of retailers. That hasn’t changed, even as the world

around us has.

This is my first Sustainability Report as Chair, having served

on the Board and in executive roles across the business,

including as Interim Group Chief Executive Officer. It’s a

privilege to keep serving this business.

New Zealand has had another tough year, and households

are still feeling real cost-of-living pressure. We can’t solve

affordability on our own, but as one of the country’s largest

retailers, we know we can play a part, through the value we

offer and how we support the communities we’re part of.

This year the Board reaffirmed the Group’s sustainability

vision, to make sustainable living easy and affordable for

everyone. It shapes how we source, how we treat our people,

and how we show up locally, and that connection to our

wider strategy matters more than ever.

Sustainability sits so close to everything else we oversee

that we changed where that oversight sits this year. We

disestablished the Environmental and Social Sustainability

Committee, moving oversight directly to the Board, with the

Audit and Risk Committee now looking after sustainability-

related risk and reporting. This isn’t a reduction in focus —

quite the opposite, it reflects how integrated into strategy

this work needs to be.

In late 2025, the Government announced proposed changes,

which if passed will mean that we are no longer required

to prepare climate statements under the Aotearoa New

Zealand Climate Standards. For this year, we are relying

on “no action” relief published by the FMA for entities who

expect their reporting obligations to cease, and so are not

preparing compliant climate statements. However, we’ve

chosen to keep reporting on climate-related matters in a

more streamlined way. Transparency here matters to us

regardless of any reporting requirements.

As one reporting requirement eases, another is taking

shape. We are supportive of the proposed Modern Slavery

legislation before Parliament. Respecting the basic human

and labour rights of workers in our supply chain is work

we’ve taken seriously for years. We’ve urged policy makers to

learn lessons from the climate-related disclosures regime,

where New Zealand went further than comparable markets

like Australia, adding complexity without necessarily

delivering a better outcome. Getting that alignment right is

important, both to enable the legislation to work and to help

businesses like ours apply it.

This report shows a business still building for the long

term, even in a demanding year, and I’m proud of our

people’s part in that. On behalf of the Board, thank you

to our management, team members and everyone who

contributed. Doing the right thing isn’t new for us. It’s part

of who we are, and what we’re building on for what comes

next.

Ngā mihi nui,

John Journee

Chair

Doing the right thing and doing good business have

always been the same thing to us - long before

either was expected of retailers.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 20264

IntroductionOur People

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our

Relationships

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

At The Warehouse Group, our purpose is to build exceptional
retail brands that customers love, our team take pride in, and

that deliver sustainable shareholder returns. Sustainability isn’t

an add-on to that, it’s part of how we get there. It guides how

we source, how we reduce waste, and how we show up for the

communities that have backed us since Sir Stephen Tindall

opened our first store in 1982.

This year, we launched This Is Warehouse Country, our brand

platform that reconnects us with our heritage and the role

we’ve played in communities across New Zealand for decades.

It’s a reminder that we’ve never stopped showing up for

families, and a commitment to making The Warehouse feel

like the centre of the community again, not just a place where

people shop.

The Good Drop, our clothing take-back partnership with The

Salvation Army, is a good example of what that looks like in

practice. It had its first full year, growing from five stores to 14

and collecting more than six tonnes of clothing, and receiving

the Sustainability Leadership Award at the Retail NZ Awards.

Our long-running Red Shirts in Schools programme and

The Salvation Army’s Aspire programme, which we helped

establish, remain some of the things I’m proudest of. Watching

young people build confidence through work experience is a

reminder of what this business can do beyond selling products

and services.

We had some real wins elsewhere too. Noel Leeming kept

over 11,000 households’ old appliances out of landfill, and its

repair teams gave around 35,000 products a second life. And

we launched New Zealand’s first Sustainable Supply Chain

Finance facility with HSBC, so suppliers doing the right thing

on sustainability get paid faster, on better terms.

A business only becomes genuinely sustainable when

its people believe in it. This year we focused on bringing

our culture home after a period of significant change,

strengthening leadership capability and giving our people

the consistency they need to do their best work, and I’ve been

pleased with how our teams have leaned into that.

Our continued partnership with Lodestone Energy kept us

moving on our own emissions. Since January 2026, every store

and site across New Zealand where we purchase electricity

has been matched with solar generation. Lower costs, more

certainty and a genuine contribution to New Zealand’s

renewable future – this is sustainability and commercial sense

pointing the same way.

We’re reporting a little differently this year, following proposed

changes to New Zealand’s climate-related disclosures regime,

but our commitment to transparency on emissions, our

transition plan and the risks we’re managing hasn’t changed.

None of this happens without our 10,000 team members, who

kept showing up for customers and communities through a

demanding year. The spirit Sir Stephen built this business on is

still what drives us.

Ngā mihi nui,

Mark Stirton

Group Chief Executive Officer

CEO’s Introduction

Thank you to our team, suppliers and customers who

keep making sustainability something we do, not

something we say.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 20265

IntroductionOur People

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our

Relationships

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

2026 at a Glance
14 stores

offering The Good Drop

clothing reuse and

recycling drop-offs

Winner of the KNAPP Sustainability

Leadership Award at the 2026

Spark Retail NZ Awards

People and Communities

$1.9m

contributed to New

Zealand charities and

communities in FY26

FY26 eNPS reflects Group-

wide survey results across

stores, distribution centres and

head offices. FY25 excluded

distribution centre team

members and is therefore not

directly comparable.

0%

Median Gender

Pay Gap (FY25: 0%)

employee Net

Promoter Score

(FY25: 36)

Group-wide median gender pay

gap was 0% (FY25: 0%), though

differences remain within some

parts of our business

Products and Circularity

of private label sales

with packaging that

met our sustainability

requirements

of post consumer waste

collected for reuse or

recycling

of private label product

sales had at least one

approved sustainability

attribute (FY25: 40%)

66%

284

tonnes

36%

Climate and Operations

of our electricity

matched with

electricity produced

by Lodestone

Energy’s solar farms

reduction in Scope

1 and market-based

Scope 2 emissions

(compared to FY23

base year)

74%90%

of operational waste

diverted from landfill

(FY25: 79%)

79%

Ethical and Responsible Sourcing

Tier 1 private label

factory social and

environmental

assessments completed

of direct sourcing

private label factory

spend covered by

verified carbon

maturity assessments

49255%

New Zealand’s first Sustainable

Supply Chain Finance facility

launched with HSBC

Our Approach
to Sustainability

About The Warehouse
Group

The Group was founded by Sir Stephen Tindall in 1982, and has

evolved from a single The Warehouse store, to become one of

the largest retailing groups in New Zealand. Our brands include

The Warehouse, Warehouse Stationery and Noel Leeming. We

have 217 retail stores across New Zealand, as well as online

stores and apps, and our two distribution centres. We also have

three overseas sourcing hubs located in China, Bangladesh and

India. We are a people-centred business with approximately

10,000 team members across our locations, serving more than

one million Kiwis in our stores each week.

Our purpose is to build exceptional retail brands that customers

love, our team take pride in, and deliver sustainable shareholder

returns. Our ambition is to be a highly desired retail stock. We’re

focused on delivering the best products at the best price, with

outstanding customer experiences to achieve our objectives

and to deliver on our long-term strategy and growth for our

shareholders and all stakeholders.

From the beginning, we’ve aimed to be a company that cares –

putting people first, supporting our communities, and working

towards a more sustainable future. We know sustainability

matters to many of our customers, but we also recognise that

many are finding it tougher than ever to make ends meet.

Our aspiration has always been to enhance quality of life in

New Zealand by making the desirable affordable – and that

aspiration remains at the heart of our business today.

This year, 44 years on from that first store, we launched our new

platform This Is Warehouse Country – reconnecting with the

communities we’ve never stopped showing up for and renewing

our ambition to be New Zealand’s most loved retailer again.

Our value chain

We run a straightforward retail model: we buy, move and sell.

Across our family of brands – The Warehouse, Warehouse

Stationery and Noel Leeming – we source from local and

international suppliers, move products through our distribution

network, and sell nationwide through stores and online.

Our offerings span everyday essentials and groceries, clothing,

homeware, toys, consumer electronics and whiteware, plus

complex technology products and services (e.g. installation,

repair and protection plans). We sell a mix of private label

and well-known third-party brands, serving both household

shoppers and commercial customers such as insurers,

government agencies, schools and businesses.

Our Purpose

To build exceptional retail

brands that customers

love, our team take pride

in, and deliver sustainable

shareholder returns

Our Ambition

Be a highly desired retail stock

Our Values

Think Customer | Do Good |

Own It

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 20268

IntroductionOur Approach

to Sustainability

Our People

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our

Relationships

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

Our Sustainable Living Plan
Sustainability is integral to how we deliver our strategy: building exceptional retail

brands that customers love, our team take pride in, and delivering sustainable

shareholder returns. Our Sustainable Living Plan is embedded in the decisions that

shape our business every day: from how products are sourced and made, to how waste

is reduced, to how value is created for customers, teams and communities.

Last year we reviewed the Plan against the Group’s strategy, reaffirmed its vision, and

sharpened our four Building Blocks into 12 action areas. In FY26, as part of the Group’s

wider strategy refresh process, we continued considering how our long-standing

community and people priorities sit alongside our environmental commitments, and

how our approach may evolve from here.

Our ambition is underpinned by goals and metrics across each Building Block, enabling

us to track progress, respond to emerging risks and expectations, and maintain strong

governance – including through our Climate Transition Plan, which guides our journey

to a lower-carbon, more climate-resilient business that supports a just transition.

The Sustainable Living Plan runs through every part of The Warehouse Group, helping

us safeguard product quality and availability, build resilience across our supply chain,

and support the communities we serve.

What follows is a summary of progress against each Building Block. Many goals were

reset last year, with our supplier engagement goal updated this year to focus on supplier

carbon-management maturity. Some areas remain at an early stage, while others are

well on track.

Product Sustainability LeadershipSustainable Living SolutionsCircularity Solutions for CustomersSustainable Operations

Value Chain Emissions

Product Sustainability Attributes

Packaging Sustainability

Supplier Engagement

Reducing Customer Emissions

Product Efficiency

Customer Reward

Post Consumer Solutions

Circular Innovation

Operational Emissions

Operational Efficiency

Reduced Waste

We will improve the sustainability

of our products and aim to cut

GHG emissions across our value

chain in line with climate science.

We will offer a range of innovative

solutions that aim to help our

customers live a more sustainable

lifestyle.

We will provide a range of

solutions that aim to help products

last longer and reduce

post-consumer waste going to

landfill

We will improve the sustainability

performance of our operations and

aim to reduce our operational GHG

emissions to zero

Ethical and Responsible Sourcing

We will source ethically and responsibly

• Ethical Sourcing Policy compliance

• Minimum sustainability requirements

Community Engagement

We will help Kiwi families thrive

• Community partnerships

• Charitable giving and volunteering

We will empower team members to thrive

• Health, safety & wellbeing

• Employee Assistance Programme (EAP)

Wellbeing and BelongingCulture, Engagement and Inclusion

We will foster connection, inclusion & impact

• Leadership and culture

• Recognition programmes

ESG Data and Reporting

We will report openly and transparently

• ESG/Sustainability Reporting

• Climate-related disclosures

Responsible Retail Foundations

Communications and Marketing

We will leverage sustainability and community to improve team member and customer engagement

Vision: To make sustainable living easy and affordable for everyone

Four transformational Building Blocks and goals underpinned by key responsible retail foundations:

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 20269

IntroductionOur Approach

to Sustainability

Our People

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our

Relationships

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

Product Sustainability Leadership
Value Chain Emissions

Aim

We will aim to progress meaningful Scope 3 emissions

reductions in high-impact and influenceable areas.

Progress

In FY26, we focused on building the data and supplier

capability needed to define credible Scope 3 priorities and

targets. See page 28 for further detail.

Product Sustainability Attributes

Aim

We will aim to increase the share of private label sales from

products with at least one approved sustainability attribute

to 100% by 2035.

Progress

In FY26, 36% of private-label sales across The Warehouse

and Warehouse Stationery came from products with one or

more approved sustainability features

1

, down from 40% in

FY25. This was influenced by significant renewal across our

product ranges during the year, particularly in apparel. This

represents 42,635 product lines and $350 million in sales.

We will aim to increase the use of approved sustainability

features across our ranges in the year ahead.

At year end, 70% of apparel and home textile sales featured

Better Cotton, recycled content or responsible certifications,

Play Studio toys using 100% recycled-content filling and

FSC®-certified wood, Market Kitchen coffee and cocoa

remained 100% Rainforest Alliance Certified, and Cruelty

Free International approved status was extended from Good

One to our new Poppi bath and shower range.

Packaging Sustainability

Aim

We will aim to phase out unnecessary or problematic

single-use plastics from our private label products and

ensure all product packaging meets our sustainability

requirements by 2035.

Progress

By the end of FY26, 66% of The Warehouse and Warehouse

Stationery private-label sales came from products with

packaging that met our sustainability requirements,

matching FY25’s performance. This year we moved to

measuring this metric by sales volume rather than sales

value, to avoid higher-priced lines skewing the result. As

we move closer to our goal, the remaining gap increasingly

sits in harder-to-switch formats, and this shift gives a more

representative view across our full range. The two years

aren’t directly comparable like-for-like.

We continued rolling out the Australasian Recycling Label

scheme, though this work remains at an early stage.

Supplier Engagement

Aim

We will aim to build carbon-management maturity across

our direct-sourcing factories.

Progress

Most of our GHG emissions sit in Scope 3, so supplier

engagement is critical. In FY26, we gained a clearer view of

carbon-management maturity across our direct-sourcing

factories and concluded that building capability, rather

than target adoption alone, should be our immediate focus.

Further detail, including our 2028 milestone and longer-

term maturity goal, is provided on page 28.

Sustainable Living Solutions

Reducing Customer Emissions

Aim

We will aim to help one million customers reduce their

GHG emissions in the home through a package of more

sustainable energy solutions by 2035.

Progress

Through our ongoing partnership with EECA - Energy

Efficiency & Conservation Authority, the Warmhouse

initiative aims to help New Zealand households stay

warm for less and use energy more efficiently. This year’s

winter campaign combined practical advice with a ‘Win a

Year’s Worth of Free Power’ giveaway and we introduced

a new Winter Saving Tips icon on our private-label heaters

directing customers to trusted guidance at the point of

purchase.

Product Efficiency

Aim

We will aim to improve the average energy and water

efficiency rating of our product portfolio by 50% by 2035

(compared to 2023).

Progress

We continued to drive energy efficiency improvements

across our private-label electronics range, with nearly half of

TV models sold during the year achieving energy star ratings

above EECA’s reported market average – including three

models reaching industry-leading 6- and 7-star ratings,

among them the best-selling VEON 50-inch 4K Smart TV.

Five of our seven Veon computer monitors also achieved

above-average energy star ratings.

Customer Reward

Aim

We will aim to incentivise and reward 1 million customers

for making more sustainable choices by 2035.

Progress

This year we deepened our understanding of what drives

customers to take part in circular and sustainable initiatives.

Through The Good Drop (see page 13) and promotional

giveaways with EECA, a clear insight has emerged: purpose,

both environmental and social, is the strongest motivator,

ahead of the reward itself. Our “thank you” offer plays a

supporting role, recognising customers and encouraging

them to come back. Over time, our aim is to turn one-off

actions into lasting habits that deliver impact at scale.

Circular Solutions for Customers

Post Consumer Solutions

Aim

We will aim to enable at least 80% of Kiwis to access

solutions to reuse or recycle a minimum of five difficult to

recycle items* by 2035.

*Problem Plastics; Electronics/Electricals; Textiles; Furniture &

Mattresses; & Food

Progress

We continued to strengthen practical pathways across our

priority waste streams – problem plastics, electronics and

textiles.

The Warehouse’s participation in the Soft Plastics Recycling

Scheme expanded to include Palmerston North and our

stores now span 54 collection points nationwide. Across 37

Noel Leeming and Warehouse Stationery stores, TechCollect

NZ collected 170 tonnes of e-waste, complemented by

nationwide take-back for phones (on behalf of RE:MOBILE)

and ink/toner cartridges (on behalf of Brother). FY26 was

also the first full year of The Good Drop, our clothing take-

1. An environmental or social attribute associated with a product that either meets a recognised third-party standard (e.g. Better Cotton or FSC) or has been internally assessed against defined requirements which address a

key social, ethical, or environmental issue in the product’s value chain.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202610

IntroductionOur Approach

to Sustainability

Our People

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our

Relationships

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

back programme with The Salvation Army and ImpacTex,
expanding from five to 14 stores and donating over six

tonnes of apparel, with 94% diverted from landfill (see also

page 13). These initiatives collectively diverted more than

284 tonnes of material in FY26 (FY25: 283 tonnes).

Circular Innovation

Aim

We will aim to pilot at least one innovative proposition or

initiative each year which aims to help products last longer

or reduce waste (e.g. repair, rental, pre-fill).

Progress

In FY26, we tested practical circular models to extend

product life and reduce waste. The Good Drop helped us

understand customer behaviour and the requirements

for scaling apparel take-back, with 45% of participating

customers saying they felt “much more positive” about The

Warehouse afterwards. With TechCollect NZ, we trialled

an electronics repair and reuse pathway and the internal

logistics needed to support it. We also began preparing

for New Zealand’s emerging synthetic refrigerant product

stewardship scheme through Fleet Team training and de-

gassing equipment at our North Island Distribution Centre.

Sustainable Operations

Operational Emissions

Aim

We will aim to reduce Scope 1 and 2 emissions, aligned to a

1.5-degree Celsius trajectory, by 65% by 2030 compared to

a 2023 base year and on a pathway to net zero operational

emissions by 2040.

Progress

By January 2026, all sites where we control electricity supply

had transitioned to electricity matched with generation

from Lodestone Energy’s solar farms. This covers 186 sites, or

around 98% of our estate, excluding shared areas outside

our operational control. The only exceptions are four

landlord-supplied sites, where electricity is supplied by the

landlord, and ChocolateWorks, our joint venture chocolate

factory.

Scope 1 and market-based Scope 2 emissions are now 74.2%

below our 2023 base year up from 45% in FY25. This means

we have achieved our 2030 goal four years early. We will

review the target and our electricity accounting approach

as international standards evolve. Further detail is provided

on pages 27-30.

Operational Efficiency

Aim

We will aim to meaningfully improve the energy efficiency

of our buildings and domestic and international logistics

activities by 2030 (compared to 2023).

Progress

Work has continued on improving the efficiency of our

buildings and logistics. More detail is on pages 25, 28 and

30.

Reduced Waste

Aim

We will aim to demonstrably reduce total waste from our

activities in New Zealand and will divert at least 90% of

waste produced from landfill by 2035.

Progress

In FY26, we again diverted 79% of operational waste from

landfill, matching the FY25 result. Operational waste covers

logistics packaging, general waste from warehouses, stores

and offices, and waste arising from services provided to

customers. FY26 was a pivotal year, as we completed a

comprehensive review of our national waste and resource

recovery model to identify materials currently treated as

waste and lift diversion rates further in FY27 and beyond.

Group non-hazardous waste totalled 12,220 tonnes, an

increase of 2% from 11,952 tonnes in FY25. We recovered

8,566 tonnes of fibre, 548 tonnes of plastic (rigid plastic,

plastic film and expanded polystyrene), achieved a 79%

hanger reuse rate, and kept hazardous waste below one

tonne.

In April 2026, some sand products were recalled after

testing indicated possible asbestos. Returns have been

stored securely pending specialist disposal and are not

included in the waste figures above.

Through our KiwiHarvest partnership, more than 21

tonnes of surplus food and non-grocery products were

redistributed to communities in FY26 rather than disposed

of. We also began planning to extend the programme from

our North Island Distribution Centre into stores.

Operational wasteWaste

generated

(tonnes)

Waste diverted

from landfill

(tonnes)

Waste directed

to landfill

(tonnes)

General waste (includes

contaminated recycling,

general mixed commercial

and special burial)

2,6052,605

Paper, cardboard and

document destruction

8,5668,566

Mixed recycling, glass and

wood

122122

Metal (metal appliances and

e-waste)

358358

Plastic (rigid plastic,

plastic film and expanded

polystyrene)

548548

Food redistribution1111

Organic waste (includes

green and food waste)

99

Hazardous waste<1<1<1

Total operational waste12,2209,6152,605

FY26 operational waste

diverted and directed to

landfill

79%21%

NOTE: Waste data covers waste generated through the Group’s

operations, including waste from services such as our large appliance

collection and recycling service. It excludes product returns and post-

consumer waste from free take-back or recycling programmes open to

the public, regardless of where the product was purchased.

Responsible Retail Foundations

Our Responsible Retail Foundations set out core practices

that underpin how we operate as a business.

For more on our approach to people, see pages 15-16;

for engaging with communities, see pages 18-19; and for

ethical and responsible sourcing, see pages 20-23.

Further detail on our approach to governance can be

found on page 32.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202611

IntroductionOur Approach

to Sustainability

Our People

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our

Relationships

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

Case Studies
Noel Leeming

Helping technology go further for longer

Technology has value long after the first sale. It runs

households, supports learning, powers work, grows

businesses and keeps whānau connected. For Noel

Leeming, the job is to help that value last.

For more than a decade, we’ve built services across the

full technology life-cycle: helping customers choose

efficient products, keeping products working through

repair, giving them a second life through trade-in and

refurbishment, and making recycling easy at the end.

Better choices, longer use, more recovery, less waste.

That’s circularity in action.

Designing circularity into the customer

experience

Some of our most important sustainability work happens

in the everyday. In FY26, our teams completed around

35,000 repairs and service interventions, keeping

products customers already own working harder for

longer.

Second-life pathways are growing fast. Since our trade-

in programme launched in April 2024, customers have

swapped eligible smartphones, laptops, tablets and

smartwatches for a gift card, with around 1,970 trade-ins

processed in FY26. In November 2025, we added quality

refurbished phones to the mix - an affordable way in for

customers and more life out of every device.

Making responsible recovery easier

Every product eventually reaches the end of the road, and

what happens next matters. Noel Leeming has run a large

appliance removal and recycling service for over a decade.

In FY26, Noel Leeming supported 11,026 households

to responsibly recycle old whiteware and appliances

through its long-standing removal and recycling service.

This was a 9.3% increase on FY25, reflecting growing

customer demand for convenient and responsible end-of-

life solutions.

That same service quietly handles the packaging too—

cardboard, plastic film and expanded polystyrene (EPS).

Each year, our stores return more than 67 tonnes of

EPS, 489 tonnes of cardboard and 4.2 tonnes of plastic

film through our own logistics network. Cardboard and

film are sent to established recycling pathways; EPS is

consolidated, cleaned, compressed and shipped to INTCO

Recycling in China, where it’s remade into products like

picture frames.

E-waste has become a growing focus since becoming a

TechCollect NZ drop-off point in 2023, customers have

recycled approximately 170 tonnes of e-waste through

our stores in FY26, safely recovering valuable materials

and hazardous components alike. We also run nationwide

take-back for mobile phones with RE:MOBILE and ink and

toner cartridges with Brother, recycling 500kg of phones

and 14 tonnes of cartridges in FY26.

Preparing for product stewardship

Product stewardship is reshaping appliance and

electronics recovery in Aotearoa New Zealand, and for

us, it’s nothing new. We’re not waiting to be told; our

work here is voluntary because we believe in it. For years

we’ve partnered with certified degassing agents to safely

destroy synthetic refrigerant gases from old appliances.

In 2026, we went further, qualifying four delivery team

members and a dedicated trainer as certified gas fillers,

joining the Cool-Safe recovery programme, and preparing

to bring degassing in-house at selected hubs.

We support product stewardship and a move to extended

product stewardship in New Zealand, and our e-waste

work reflects that. In March 2025, TechCollect NZ applied

for priority product stewardship accreditation, drawing

on real-world experience gained through three years

of operation across 29 Noel Leeming stores. In FY26,

Hastings, Gore and Porirua stores joined the scheme,

with support from local council funding, bringing the

TechCollect footprint to 32 Noel Leeming stores, alongside

five Warehouse Stationery stores. While the Ministry for

Cities, Environment, Regions and Transport (MCERT)

continues to consider the application, we’ve continued

to grow the programme and strengthen how we recover

e-waste. We’re also testing smarter recovery, trialling our

own delivery fleet to move e-waste at Wairau Park and

Manukau from November to January, and working with

a specialist refurbishment partner to assess how much

donated e-waste could be repaired rather than recycled.

Early signs are promising, with some higher-value assets

worth saving even when first written off.

Powered by people and looking ahead

Behind every repair, removal, trade-in and recycled

product are Noel Leeming people making circularity real

for customers, day in, day out. That everyday expertise is

one of our strongest sustainability assets.

The future of technology isn’t just about what’s next. It’s

about making what we already have go further, through

services, partnerships and capability that help customers

buy well, use longer, recover value, and recycle responsibly

at the end.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202612

IntroductionOur Approach

to Sustainability

Our People

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our

Relationships

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

The Good Drop
Finding value in unwanted clothing

The Good Drop began as a five-store pilot in June 2025

to help customers donate unwanted clothing for reuse

or recycling. In FY26, we expanded the initiative to 14

stores from Whangārei to Timaru, and collected more

than six tonnes of clothing. By keeping more garments in

use, the initiative supports affordable access to clothing,

helps generate funding for community services through

charitable reuse partners, and reduces the volume of

textiles going to landfill. The initiative’s impact hasn’t

gone unnoticed either, with The Good Drop receiving

the KNAPP Sustainability Leadership Award at the 2026

Retail NZ Awards, acknowledging its role in providing a

practical, end-to-end circular solution for clothing, helping

extend garment life while delivering environmental and

community benefits.

Strong results, responsibly delivered

Results to date are strong. Research suggests only 20%

of clothing donations are considered re-sellable, but

in practice 52% of Good Drop donations have been

retained for resale, 42% through The Salvation Army

Family Stores and a further 10% through other charity or

reuse pathways. The initiative is intentionally designed to

support charitable reuse, not overwhelm the system. Any

Good Drop garments not suitable for resale are boxed up

and sent to ImpacTex for recycling, so 94% of donations

are kept out of landfill.

Whangārei in practice

Sustainability is about more than preserving and restoring

nature. It is also about helping whānau and communities

flourish. In Whangārei, The Warehouse store and local

Salvation Army Family Store show what this looks like in

practice. Since joining the pilot, the store has collected

more than 2.5 tonnes of unwanted clothing, with over half

suitable for reuse through Salvation Army pathways.

The local Family Store sits within a wider reuse ecosystem

that includes Intercept Fabric Rescue. Together, these

organisations direct garments to the pathway where

they can deliver the greatest social, environmental and

community value. Intercept gives materials new life

through repair, reuse and upcycling, while other local

partners provide accessible clothing support for people

experiencing financial hardship.

Turning donations into social value

Through resale, every two donated garments sold

through The Family Store generate approximately $13 in

revenue on average. After operating costs, around 20%

supports The Salvation Army’s social and community

programmes, including food support, housing assistance,

debt counselling, family support, children’s services and

addiction support. One unwanted garment can become

affordable clothing for one household, while helping fund

practical support for another.

This local ecosystem shows that second-hand retail

isn’t just a stop-over to landfill. It sorts, prices, repairs,

redistributes and recovers products that have already had

a first life, creating affordable access to essential goods,

supporting community services and reducing material

moving to landfill or lower-value recycling. The Good

Drop is a small part of a much larger movement: the

2026 Aotearoa New Zealand Reuse Impact Study found

charitable reuse organisations nationally enabled the

reuse of 46.9 million items and delivered an estimated

$844 million in cost-of-living relief last year alone.

What we’re learning about customers

The Good Drop is also giving us a better understanding

of how customers engage with circular initiatives, and

how we can thank them for taking part. Through The

Warehouse’s loyalty platform, the pilot has recorded

437 confirmed donations from 336 unique customers,

including 24 repeat donors, with 37% of customers

redeeming the thank-you offer they received.

Encouragingly, customers who took up the offer came

back to shop with us too, spending on average 90% more

per transaction than baseline apparel shoppers.

Looking ahead

While still early, The Good Drop shows how circular

initiatives can deliver for people, planet and profit,

supporting customers and communities, keeping more

clothing in use, and helping The Warehouse build insight

into commercially viable models for circular retail.

The Good Drop’s impact is best understood as a practical

example of shared value. Customers find it easier to act,

community partners capture more value from donated

goods, and more clothing stays in circulation for longer.

For The Warehouse, it shows how a value retailer can

make circular action more accessible while supporting

trusted community partners. As the initiative evolves, the

focus remains on increasing the proportion of clothing

that stays in reuse and strengthening the partnerships

that turn unwanted garments into lasting social and

environmental outcomes.

Click here to find out more

about The Good Drop

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202613

IntroductionOur Approach

to Sustainability

Our People

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our

Relationships

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

Our People

Growing Our People
and Culture

Bringing our culture home

The past year has been about reconnecting our people

to our brands and purpose, while building strong

foundations for the next chapter of The Warehouse

Group.

Following a period of significant organisational change,

we focused on supporting leaders through change and

creating greater consistency in how our teams work, learn

and grow.

Across The Warehouse, Warehouse Stationery and Noel

Leeming, we invested in a stronger and more connected

team member experience. This included leadership

development, learning opportunities, new ways of

working, and programmes focused on recognition,

wellbeing and belonging.

This work is ongoing, but the foundations are now

in place. As a proudly New Zealand business, we are

building a culture that reflects who we are, our heritage,

and where we are heading together.

Growing leaders and capability

This year was about creating greater consistency,

discipline and support for leaders across our stores,

distribution centres and support offices.

We continued to invest in leadership development

through Lead 1, Lead 2, Emerge and Evolve, with a focus

on building capability across our store and frontline

leadership teams. Alongside these programmes, we

provided practical support for leaders navigating

organisational change, leading integrated teams

and building connection across remote and hybrid

environments.

We broadened access to development opportunities

for frontline team members, improving onboarding

experiences and ensuring compliance learning remained

a priority. We expanded cultural learning opportunities

and supported leaders through coaching, feedback, CEO

breakfast sessions and high-performing team workshops.

Looking ahead, our focus is on building deeper expertise

through craft-specific learning, succession planning and

future talent pathways that support career development

and help our people grow with The Warehouse Group.

Building a culture people want to

be part of

Over the past year, we continued to invest in team

engagement through recognition, wellbeing and

belonging programmes, helping our people feel more

connected, supported and valued.

Through Celebrate, High Five Awards, Quarterly Values

Awards, Trailblazer CEO Awards, service milestones

and our annual Impact Awards, we created more

opportunities to recognise great work and reinforce

the behaviours that matter most. Alongside this, we

continued creating moments of connection through

cultural celebrations, community initiatives, sporting

events, team activities and other small moments that

bring people together.

This year, we expanded our MyVoice engagement survey

across our stores, distribution centres and support offices,

giving us our clearest view yet of the team member

experience.

The results reflect an organisation undergoing significant

change and highlight areas where we can do better.

While there is more work to do, the survey provides

valuable insights to help us strengthen engagement and

better support our people.

FY26 People & Culture Snapshot

MeasureFY26

Learning Hours Delivered32,900

1

Leaders Participating in Lead, Emerge &

Evolve, Leading Integrated teams, CEO

Breakfast series

382

MyVoice Participation65%

eNPS25

2

Average team member tenure7 years

3

1. Covers structured learning delivered across the Group, including

eLearning and in-person sessions, but excluding on-the-floor

onboarding

2. Down from 36 in FY25, although the results are not directly

comparable as distribution centre team members were not surveyed

in FY25.

3. Average (mean) length of service for permanent New Zealand-based

team members as at year-end (headcount 7,539).

Employee Turnover

FY2632.2%

FY2518.1%

FY2423.7%

FY2326.9%

FY2228.4%

NOTE: The employee turnover rate relates to voluntary departures only

and excludes redundancies and other employer-initiated leavers. The

increase in FY26 reflects changes in voluntary departures and a lower

average headcount, partly reflecting organisational changes associated

with the transfer of some services to TCS during the year.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202615

Our People

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our

Relationships

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

Introduction

Supporting Our People
to Thrive

Wellbeing, inclusion and

belonging

Supporting our people to thrive remains central to our

culture.

Our wellbeing approach continues to focus on four key

pillars: physical, mental, financial and social wellbeing.

Throughout the year, we delivered initiatives that

supported team members through different life stages

while increasing awareness of the wellbeing resources

available to them.

We continued to support our people through important

life stages, including our 26-week paid parental leave. In

FY26, 83 team members made use of the policy.

Through The Warehouse Group Foundation, we also

provide a Team Member Emergency Assistance Fund for

those facing unforeseen personal hardship or the impacts

of a natural disaster. In FY26, four team members received

grants from this fund.

We strengthened our focus on diversity, equity, inclusion

and belonging. This included ongoing work to improve

gender equity, celebrate the diverse cultures represented

across our workforce and create an environment where

people feel respected, valued and included.

We remain committed to building a diverse and inclusive

workforce that reflects the communities we serve. In FY26,

37.5% of our senior leaders were women (FY25: 45.2%),

against our target of 50%. Our Group-wide median

gender pay gap was 0% (FY25: 0%), though differences

remain within some parts of our business. Additional

workforce diversity data is provided in the Corporate

Governance section of our FY26 Annual Report. In FY27,

we intend to review our diversity and inclusion objectives,

along with the initiatives needed to support their

achievement.

Our commitment to Te Ao Māori remains an important

part of this journey, helping us strengthen our connection

to Aotearoa New Zealand while ensuring our culture

reflects the communities and customers we serve.

This includes activities for our teams to celebrate and

participate in Te Wiki o te Reo Māori and Matariki.

Health and safety

As an ACC-Accredited Employer, we continue to maintain

effective health and safety systems across the Group. In

line with the commitment set out in last year’s report, we

delivered targeted measures in FY26 to address the injury

trends identified in FY25.

Although we recognise there is more work to do, we saw

an improvement in our injury indicators in FY26. Total

Recordable Injuries (TRI) decreased 12.2% to 330, from 376

in FY25, while the Total Recordable Injury Frequency Rate

(TRIFR) decreased to 28.3 per million hours worked, from

30.2 in FY25. Lost Time Injuries (LTI) decreased 16.6% to

196, from 235 in FY25, and the Lost Time Injury Frequency

Rate (LTIFR) decreased to 16.8 per million hours worked,

from 18.9 in FY25. Musculoskeletal injuries continued to

account for the majority of our injuries and will be the

focus of a targeted improvement initiative in FY27.

Recorded critical risk events decreased to two in FY26,

from eight in FY25. We continued the reset of our critical

risk programme and aligned our assurance processes

to support it. This included establishing risk profiles

to support a right-fit health, safety and wellbeing

framework across our organisation, developing key

critical risk standards and completing initial testing to

assess whether our critical controls were in place and

effective. Findings from this testing will inform our FY27

improvement priorities and the continued development

of our supporting systems.

Violent and aggressive behaviour towards our store teams

remains a significant challenge for the New Zealand retail

sector. In FY26, recorded events decreased 15% to 193,

from 227 in FY25. We continue to focus on strengthening

the systems and controls that support our teams and

manage this risk, including exploring technology-based

solutions to improve monitoring and early identification

of concerning behaviour in our stores.

There have been zero workplace fatalities for the ninth

year in a row.

28.3 per

million hours

Total Recordable Injury

Frequency Rate (TRIFR)

(FY25: 30.2)

16.8 per

million hours

Lost Time Injury

Frequency Rate (LTIFR)

(FY25: 18.9)

2 critical

risk events

(FY25: 8)

Looking ahead

In FY27, our focus is to build on the progress made over

the past year.

We will focus on leadership capability, succession

planning and talent pathways, while reviewing our

diversity, equity, inclusion and belonging objectives and

the initiatives needed to support them.

We will continue developing our health and safety

programme, with a focus on reducing musculoskeletal

injuries, strengthening critical risk management and

improving the systems and controls that help keep our

teams safe.

By investing in our people, we are creating a stronger

organisation and a workplace where people can grow,

contribute and thrive.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202616

Our People

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our

Relationships

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

Introduction

Our Relationships

Our Communities
Across our three brands, we’re within a 20-minute drive

of 85% of Kiwis, wherever they live. That reach comes

with a responsibility, not just to provide the products

and services our customers need, but also to back the

communities they call home, in the way we always have.

This year, alongside our wider strategy work, we took a

closer look at how we show up for communities, thinking

harder about the causes that matter most to New

Zealanders and to us, and the partners best placed to help

us make a genuine difference rather than just a gesture.

That thinking builds on the strategy we refined in FY25,

and continues to focus on the essentials, from period

products and youth development to festive support at

Christmas.

We continued to partner with The Kindness Collective, The

Salvation Army, Variety – the Children’s Charity, Youthline

and Women’s Refuge, working with each to find new

ways to reach the people who need it most, through both

national campaigns and local, store-level initiatives.

This year, we deepened our partnerships with KiwiHarvest,

redistributing surplus food and products to communities

in need, and with EECA, helping families find more

affordable ways to stay warm this winter.

We support two national campaigns each year, Be the

Joy at Christmas and Kindness Collective’s PJ Project

in winter, alongside local fundraising our stores run

throughout the year for the causes that matter most in

their communities.

Our team members can give directly through payroll

giving, donating straight from their wages to the causes

they care about, with $54,884 contributed this way in

FY26.

Every team member can take a paid day each year to

volunteer in their community. In FY26, 185 volunteering

hours were recorded, although we know this understates

team member participation because not all activity was

captured centrally. Our teams volunteered in activities

ranging from packing food parcels to helping families

at The Kindness Collective’s Joy Store, reflecting our

value of Doing Good. Improving how we capture data on

volunteering activity will be a focus in FY27.

We expect our community work to evolve further in FY27,

focusing on the causes and partnerships where we feel we

can make the greatest impact.

Thanks to the generosity of our customers and our teams,

$1.9 million was contributed to New Zealand charities and

local community groups in FY26.

The power of the Red Bag

Our iconic $1 Red Bag is more than just a recycled,

reusable shopping bag. Every time a customer purchases

one, the proceeds help us give back to Kiwi communities

in a meaningful way. A portion of every Red Bag sold

supports our national community partners, while another

portion stays with the local store team, empowering them

to respond to the unique needs of their communities. This

year, Red Bag sales generated $1.35 million in support for

causes across Aotearoa New Zealand.

Be the Joy: bringing joy to families

at Christmas

Our team and customers came together in an

extraordinary show of generosity for Be the Joy in FY26,

our annual Christmas fundraising campaign. Running

from 19 November to 24 December, customers could add

$2 or more at the checkout in-store or online, or donate

new toys and gifts for Women’s Refuge at dedicated

in-store collection points. Across our retail brands, we

raised $262,067 for four partners: The Kindness Collective,

The Salvation Army, Variety – the Children’s Charity,

and Women’s Refuge. Together, we helped bring joy to

thousands of families across the country with gifts, toys,

and food for Christmas.

PJ Project: keeping Kiwi kids warm

over winter

This winter, our team and customers supported Kindness

Collective’s PJ Project, their campaign to keep children

and families warm during the coldest months of the year.

Alongside in-store donations, we sold exclusive Kindness

Collective pyjamas at $10 a pair, with $1 from every sale

going straight to the project. We supported their National

PJ Day, with many of our stores and head office team

members wearing their PJs for the day and donating a

gold coin to the cause. Thanks to their generosity, we

raised $148,982, and 34,484 pairs of PJs were donated to

families across Aotearoa New Zealand.

Products that give back

Some of the everyday products our customers buy also

give back. Our iconic $1 Red Bag leads the way, but it’s far

from being the only product that gives back.

We help make period products more accessible through

our range of private label $2 pads, with one in every ten

sold being donated to local organisations in need through

our partnership with The Kindness Collective. We donated

66,224 units in FY26, bringing the total donated since the

programme began to 534,540 units. We also provide free

period products for our team members.

Also, our exclusive Kindness Collective pyjama range saw

$1 from every pair donated to the PJ Project to help keep

Kiwi kids warm.

$1.9m

contributed to charities

and community groups

in FY26

contributed to charities

and community groups

since our doors opened

in 1982

$90m

More than

$262,067

raised to help

Kiwi families for

Christmas 2025

$148,982

raised to help

keep kids warm

this winter

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202618

Our

Relationships

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

IntroductionOur People

Supporting youth pathways
With youth unemployment in New Zealand at its highest in decades, helping rangatahi

into work matters more than ever, and as one of the country’s largest retail employers,

we believe we have a role to play.

Red Shirts in Schools

Our long-running Gateway programme, Red Shirts in Schools, gives Year 11 to 13 students

hands-on retail experience, helping them build confidence, develop workplace skills

and earn NCEA credits. This year we relaunched the programme with a new delivery

partner, GRIP, bringing a more consistent, nationally supported model and reducing the

coordination load on our stores. We also introduced a new Level 3 pathway, RISE (Retail

Industry Skills Experience), alongside the existing Level 2, giving students a clearer route

from school towards employment.

In FY26, 361 students took part across 33 stores and 40 schools. Since the programme

began in the mid 2000s, it has supported more than 7,700 students, including team

members across the business who started their careers this way.

Aspire with The Salvation Army

We continue to support Aspire, a programme created in partnership with The Salvation

Army, which celebrated its tenth year in FY26. Aspire helps young people build

confidence, resilience and essential life skills through weekly group sessions, outdoor

adventures and community projects, all led by experienced youth workers. The impact

shows up in real change: early results this year found a 22% increase in young people

feeling comfortable engaging with adults, and a 33% increase in those feeling able to

talk to others about their problems.

Aspire runs on a calendar-year basis, and across the school years spanning FY26 some 381

rangatahi took part, with more to come during the rest of the 2026 calendar year. Since it

began, the programme has supported over 3,500 young people.

Variety – the Children’s Charity

For more than 20 years, we have proudly supported Variety – the Children’s Charity,

helping improve the health, education and wellbeing of children experiencing material

deprivation.

In FY26, our support helped 371 children through Variety’s Individual Grant programme,

having a positive impact on an estimated 1,744 lives across Aotearoa New Zealand. This

funded 91 education grants for needs including digital devices, school uniforms and

stationery, 166 wellbeing grants to help children take part in extracurricular activities,

and 114 health grants covering essentials such as medical costs, mobility support and

bedding. Our teams also raised $75,128 for Variety through Noel Leeming’s Friends

and Family event and annual Gala Awards night, and we directly sponsor 100 children

through the Kiwi Kid Sponsorship programme.


The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202619

Our

Relationships

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

IntroductionOur People

Trading Ethically and
Responsibly

Our ethical sourcing programme has been in place for

more than 20 years, and the principle behind it hasn’t

changed: we have a duty to make sure the basic human

and labour rights of the workers in our supply chain are

respected, and that the products we sell are made in

safe, fair and environmentally responsible conditions. In

a global sourcing environment that remains fast-moving

and fiercely competitive, that work matters as much now

as it ever has.

Our Ethical Sourcing Policy sets the framework. It

applies to all suppliers, with our focus on the private

label, exclusive and licensed products we source for The

Warehouse and Warehouse Stationery — around 49%

of sales for these retail brands in FY26. It draws clear

Zero Tolerance lines on issues like child or forced labour,

bribery and unauthorised production, treats transparency

as non-negotiable, and sets baseline expectations on

environmental responsibility and compliance with local

laws.

The programme has continued to mature over the past

decade moving from factory-level compliance towards

responsible sourcing across the whole value chain —

engaging lower-tier suppliers in priority categories

and tightening our approach to raw materials such as

timber, palm oil, cocoa and cotton, where social and

environmental risks are most closely linked. We back

this with training, supported improvement plans and

a Supplier Scorecard rating ethical and environmental

performance. This year we went further on climate,

making completion of the ERSA Verified Carbon

Self-Assessment Questionnaire (SAQ) a qualification

requirement for factories with significant spend (see

page 28), and our Supply Chain Finance programme

with HSBC evolved into a Sustainable Supply Chain

Finance mechanism, linking a supplier’s sustainability

performance to the finance rates available to them (see

page 23).

We also made written and oral submissions to the

Education and Workforce Committee on the Modern

Slavery Bill, supporting the Bill while calling for alignment

with Australia and other international regimes and for

offshore selling platforms to be brought into scope.

Assessment and monitoring

We qualify every production site before any orders

are placed and monitor on a risk basis from there.

Our assessments use the LRQA Elevate Responsible

Sourcing Assessment (ERSA) 3.0 tool, which looks across

labour, health and safety, business ethics and basic

environmental practices, with sites graded A to D; a

site must reach at least a C to qualify, though in certain

cases a D may be given temporary approval where a

focused remediation plan is in place. Assessments are

carried out by approved partners, with validated self-

assessments or recent third-party audits accepted where

appropriate, and sites are reassessed every one to three

years depending on risk. Most assessments are semi-

announced, but we will visit unannounced where we have

cause for concern, and our local teams run witnessed

and shadow audits and random spot checks to test

consistency and catch risks like unauthorised production

or subcontracting.

While our focus is first-tier production sites, since FY22

we’ve traced and assessed second-tier sites in textiles,

wood and paper. Where an assessment identifies a critical

issue, the supplier must put a time-bound Corrective

Action Plan (CAP) in place, overseen by our local teams,

and persistent non-disclosure can end a relationship.

Our Zero Tolerances cover the most serious breaches

— denying us access to a site or records, unauthorised

production, child or forced labour, harassment or abuse of

workers, bribery or corruption, and serious environmental

harm such as the dumping of hazardous waste. When

any of these come to light, we act straight away, whether

that’s by enforcing a financial penalty, halting production,

or ultimately ending the contract.

We use LRQA’s EiQ platform to benchmark social and

environmental risk in real time and track assessment

status, and continue to draw on its Sentinel feature, which

scans global media and online sources to flag emerging

environmental, social and governance (ESG) or labour-

related concerns linked to our supply chain as they arise.

Source country profile

China remained our largest sourcing base in FY26,

accounting for 65% of private-label and licensed

product spend, followed by New Zealand at 19%

and Bangladesh at 7%. Together, these three

markets represented more than 91% of spend.

India, Vietnam and Indonesia accounted for a

further 5%, with the remaining 4% spread across a

long tail of lower-volume markets in Asia, Europe

and elsewhere. While China remains our primary

sourcing market, New Zealand-made products

continue to play an important role, particularly

across grocery and garden. Since 2018, we have

published on our website a list of the Tier 1 sites

used to manufacture our private-label products,

together with Tier 2 sites in the textiles, wood

and paper supply chains above a defined spend

threshold.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202620

Our

Relationships

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

IntroductionOur People

FY26 Ethical Sourcing Programme
307,500+

837

active Tier 1 factories

workers in active Tier 1 factories

Audit

and due

diligence

Worker

voice

Zero

tolerance

findings

8

Remediation

and supplier

development

183

Newly qualified

factories

1

2,614

Worker

interviewees

9

8

Unauthorised

production

2

Bribery

notification

1

Access denied

1

Withholding

of wages

1

CAP refusal

1

Threatened

worker retaliation

492

Tier 1 factory

assessments

2

48

Tier 1 factories

declined or

discontinued

59%

Average onsite

audit score

94%

Audit

transparency

3


96%

Production

traceability

4

34

Tier 2 factories

registered, trained

and assessed

473

Corrective Action

Plans (CAPs)

actively managed

5

317

Corrective Action

Plans (CAPs)

completed

2,044

e-learning lessons

completed

6

207

Supplier training

sessions

7

7

factories enrolled in our Beyond

Social Compliance Programme

1. Includes ERSA audits, ERSA Self-Assessment Questionnaires (SAQs), and qualifying audit reports converted into an ERSA equivalent score (EQs)

2. Includes ERSA audits, ERSA SAQs, and EQs

3. % validated verbal and documented audit disclosures

4. Traceability of orders to qualified factories

5. Factories under post-audit monitoring and support and includes CAPs carried over from FY25

6. Modules include audit preparation, working hours control, wages and benefits, health and safety, transparency and ethics, corrective action planning, vendor responsibility, climate and water management, and prevention

of modern slavery (forced and child labour)

7. Number of onsite or virtual training sessions delivered to vendors or factories to assist them to prepare for assessments or execute any Corrective Action Plans

8. Discovered via independent auditors or local team assessments, and may be subject to financial penalties and / or business termination

9. Privately interviewed by our team members or independent auditors.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202621

Our

Relationships

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

IntroductionOur People

Audit performance and findings
The charts below summarise the results of our FY26 assessments for Tier 1 production sites. The first shows the distribution of audit ratings across all factories. The second highlights

the prevalence of non-compliances by topic.

FY26 audit finding prevalence by topic

Labour

Health and Safety

Management Systems

Environment

Business Ethics

Note: 2,141 findings identified across 233 ERSA audits carried out in FY26. Labour (e.g. issues associated with

hours of work and wages and benefits) and health and safety findings represented over 94% of findings.

Business ethics includes transparency issues such as site access denied or inconsistent records.

FY26 audit rating distribution

A - Top performer – no findings or

very few minor/moderate ones.

B - Ceiling for factories with major

issues – if there is a major issue,

factory will be rated at B at best.

C - Bottom line for factories without

critical issues. If there is no critical

issue, factory will be rated at C at

worst.

D - Poor performance – critical or

Zero Tolerance violations identified.

Note: Audit rating distribution from 233 ERSA onsite audits carried out in FY26. Audits are scored 0-100 and

graded as follows A (100-91), B (90-71), C (70-51) and D (50-0).

In FY26 we qualified 183 new factories, while 48 factories were declined or discontinued for failing to meet our required standards. We applied our Zero Tolerance escalation

process wherever serious concerns were identified, recording 14 escalations during the year. These comprised eight cases of unauthorised production, two bribery notifications, one

instance of access being denied, one wage withholding concern (flagged through routine monitoring, where a verified enhanced compensation payment was followed by a repeat

breach, leading to discontinuation), one refusal to complete a Corrective Action Plan, and one threat of retaliation against workers; the bribery and retaliation cases have also been

discontinued. Each case was managed through our escalation and remediation process, which can result in penalties, halted production or, ultimately, ending the relationship.

Tier 2 sites used for textiles, wood and paper products were assessed separately by our local team on a pass/fail basis.

During FY26, Sentinel flagged two factory fire incidents, one in Bangladesh and one in Pakistan, that had not been reported to us directly. Our local teams followed up with the

suppliers concerned, and neither incident affected orders.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202622

Our

Relationships

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

IntroductionOur People

Deeper due diligence – Tier 2 transparency
Our Tier 2 programme, begun in FY22, focuses on textiles, wood and paper, categories

where labour and environmental risks like water use and chemical discharge often sit

deeper in the supply chain. In FY26, valid assessments covered 38% of spend across

these products.

Looking ahead, we will sharpen our country and category risk lens so effort follows the

highest risks, refresh assessments as they fall due, and make greater use of Sentinel

monitoring to track modern slavery and other ESG risks in real time, building a Tier 2

programme that is increasingly proactive, data-driven and scalable.

Supplier engagement and development

Because audits on their own don’t create lasting change, we invest in capability

alongside them, through e-learning, training and supported improvement plans

covering both labour rights and basic environmental practices.

Beyond Social Compliance Programme

In FY25 we piloted our Beyond Social Compliance Programme, now a key part of how

we support factories that matter to us but fall short of our standards, where there is a

genuine willingness to improve. Working alongside factory management and specialist

local partners, the pilot has supported seven factories across China and India, tackling

issues from excessive working hours and wage compliance to fire safety, chemical

handling and, in one case, a critical wastewater problem resolved by connecting

untreated discharge to the site’s treatment plant. Results have been encouraging, with

one factory lifting its compliance score by more than 60% and resolving its most serious

finding. A key learning is that lasting change takes more than fixing individual issues.

One factory began strongly, but a change in leadership midway through set progress

back. This highlighted that sustained improvement depends on stable management

and embedded capability, not one-off remediation.

Supplier Scorecard and Sustainable Supply Chain Finance

Every active direct-sourcing supplier providing products in FY26 had a Supplier

Scorecard. Rather than looking at audit results alone, the Scorecard combines three

sustainability measures (ethical sourcing, packaging sustainability and product

sustainability) alongside wider commercial and operational performance, giving a single

view of each supplier and an overall Red, Amber or Green rating. Of the 408 suppliers

rated in FY26, 15% were Green, 69% Amber and 16% Red.

We plan to add a carbon management maturity metric to the Scorecard in FY27,

embedding a supplier’s climate capability progress directly into its overall rating (see

page 28 for more detail).

The Scorecard also underpins our Sustainable Supply Chain Finance (SSCF) programme

with HSBC, New Zealand’s first facility of its kind, which evolved from our long-standing

supply chain finance arrangement in FY26. Around 80% of direct-sourcing suppliers are

enrolled in the programme, which rewards stronger sustainability performance through

the finance rates available from HSBC. During the year our SSCF programme was

named joint regional winner of the Best ESG Supply Chain Solution at The Asset Triple A

Treasurise Awards 2026, and was a finalist in the INFINZ Awards (Innovation in Financial

Services) and the Retail NZ Awards (Sustainability Leadership).

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202623

Our

Relationships

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

IntroductionOur People

Our Climate Transition
and Emissions

Our Climate Transition
and Emissions

We have measured, reported and independently assured

our GHG emissions since around 2006. Following

proposed changes to the Group’s reporting obligations,

from FY26 we are providing streamlined climate-related

reporting as part of our broader sustainability reporting.

This focuses on progress against our Climate Transition

Plan and our annual GHG emissions inventory. Our

approach continues to be informed by the climate-

related scenario analysis, risks and opportunities

developed through our earlier disclosures, which remain

broadly unchanged and continue to shape our transition

planning.

A key development this year is that our climate-related

key risk indicators, previously under development, have

progressed and been incorporated into the Group’s

enterprise risk management framework. Further detail on

how we monitor these risks is provided on page 32.

Transition Planning

Guided by our Sustainable Living Plan, our Climate

Transition Plan sets out how we intend to move towards

becoming a lower-carbon, more climate-resilient business

that supports a just transition. As a founding signatory of

the Climate Leaders Coalition, we support the goals of the

Paris Agreement and are committed to contributing to

New Zealand’s target of net zero GHG emissions by 2050.

Developed in FY25, the plan focuses on four priority levers:

• Products and customers: expanding lower-impact

ranges and services that help customers reduce in-

use emissions and household energy costs.

• Supply chain: improving supplier data quality

and carbon-management maturity to support

future embodied-emissions reductions in priority

categories.

• Operations: improving energy performance of stores

and distribution centres, optimising logistics and

reducing waste.

• Ways of working: embedding climate

considerations in day-to-day decisions through

stronger governance, clearer accountabilities and

better data.

The overview on the next page maps these levers

across our Sustainable Living Plan Building Blocks

and supporting enablers, showing the foundations

established through FY25, our priorities through to FY28

and potential future steps.

This year we continued to progress actions across

these levers. We expanded the use of independently

Verified Carbon SAQ assessments across our direct-

sourcing factories, with completion now a qualification

requirement for factories with significant spend. We also

launched Sustainable Supply Chain Finance with HSBC,

progressed LED lighting and HVAC upgrades in parts of

our estate, completed a review of our national waste and

resource-recovery model, moved to a new GHG emissions

inventory solution and incorporated climate-related risks

into the Group’s enterprise risk management framework.

In FY27, we will continue reviewing the transition plan

and its targets to ensure they remain aligned with

our business strategy, priorities and evolving climate

standards. Delivering the plan depends on addressing

several foundational challenges, including gaps in Scope

3 data and capability, potential misalignment in policy

and regulation, and constraints around cost, capital

and technology. We also recognise the inherent tension

between our drive to return to profitability and growth,

and the need to reduce our environmental footprint.

Regulation, insurance costs, consumer sentiment and

supply chain resilience remain key uncertainties that we

continue to monitor so our plan can adapt as conditions

change.

We have not identified any specific amounts of capital

expenditure, financing or investment deployed towards

climate-related risks and opportunities in FY26. In

FY24, we amended our project reporting to include a

dedicated field for identifiable projects with climate

and sustainability considerations applicable to all

investment requests regardless of value. For example, in

FY26 the Group invested approximately $1.75 million in

store upgrades, including LED retail lighting and HVAC

replacement.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202625

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Key Goals
An overview of our Climate Transition Plan

The following overview shows the foundations established through FY25, our priorities through to FY28 and potential future steps. The plan will continue to evolve in response to

science, regulation, stakeholder feedback, business needs and our commercial and financial realities. This may include updating our goals, capabilities and actions as the challenges,

assumptions and dependencies underpinning the plan change.

Towards becoming a lower carbon, more climate-resilient, and just retail business

Sustainable Living Plan

Building Block and Foundations

FY23-25

Foundations established

FY26-28

Our priorities

FY29+

Potential future steps

Product Sustainability Leadership Established product and packaging sustainability

requirements, introduced the Supplier Sustainability

Scorecard and began verified carbon-management

assessments with our direct-sourcing factories.

Build carbon-management maturity across our direct-

sourcing factories (p. 28), while continuing to improve

product and packaging sustainability within commercial

guardrails (p. 10) and recognising stronger supplier

performance through Sustainable Supply Chain Finance

(p. 23).

Further supplier collaboration and innovation to

reduce product and packaging impacts.

Sustainable Living Solutions Established customer partnerships and trials focused

on household energy efficiency, more efficient products

and incentives for more sustainable choices.

Strengthen partnerships, product improvements and

customer incentives that help households reduce energy

use, emissions and costs (p. 10).

Scale commercially viable solutions in

collaboration with suppliers, partners and

customers.

Circular Solutions for Customers Expanded customer access to recycling for soft plastics,

electronics and other difficult-to-recycle products, and

piloted clothing take-back and reuse.

Expand viable reuse, repair and recycling solutions that

help products and materials remain in use for longer (p.

10; case studies, pp. 12–13).

Scale circular services and partnerships that keep

products and materials in use for longer.

Running a More Sustainable Operation Established our renewable electricity partnership with

Lodestone Energy, shifted our passenger fleet towards

lower-emissions vehicles and maintained operational

waste diversion above 70%.

Having achieved our 2030 operational emissions

reduction target early, continue improving the emissions

and resource efficiency of our stores, distribution centres

and logistics (pp. 25 and 28–30), while progressing waste

reduction and landfill diversion (p. 11).

Future actions guided by new insights, public

policy, and innovation as we continue our pathway

to zero emissions across our owned New Zealand

operations by 2040.

Responsible Retail Foundations Embedded climate expectations within our Ethical

Sourcing Policy and began strengthening customer and

team engagement on sustainability.

Strengthen climate awareness and capability across

our teams and suppliers, including through supplier

qualification, development and performance processes.

See pages 20–23 and 28.

Future actions may include assessing supply chain

climate vulnerability and expecting strategic

suppliers to have adaptation plans in place.

Supporting Activity and Enablers

Governance and AccountabilityStrengthened Board and executive oversight of climate-

related matters and began aligning climate-related risks

with the Group’s enterprise risks.

Embed climate-related risks within enterprise risk

management (p. 32) and clarify accountability for

transition priorities, targets and reporting.

Continue embedding climate considerations across

the business through Board oversight, enterprise

risk management and periodic strategy reviews.

Data, Systems and InsightsIdentified material emissions-data gaps and began

improving the collection and management of Scope 1,

Scope 2 and selected Scope 3 information.

Improve emissions data, systems (pp. 27–30) and supplier

capability (p. 28) to support credible Scope 3 priorities,

targets and reporting.

Improve alignment with financial reporting and

progressively integrate emissions data across our

financial, procurement and supplier systems.

Policy and Financial AlignmentReflected climate targets in our wider sustainability

strategy and introduced climate and sustainability

considerations into capital-investment requests.

Continue to consider climate and sustainability in

relevant investment, financing, procurement and

operational decisions (p. 25).

Continue integrating climate into procurement,

investment, and capital planning processes.

FY23 Base year

Operational emissions baseline

2028

Milestone

2030

Target

2040

Aspiration

Supplier carbon maturity

Majority of direct-sourcing

factory spend moving beyond

foundational carbon management

practices

✔ 65% emissions

reduction

Scope 1 and market-based

Scope 2 emissions

Net Zero emissions

across our New Zealand

operations

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202626

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Metrics and Targets
GHG emissions inventory

Emissions categories

The Group currently assesses operational impact on the

climate by measuring our absolute Scope 1 and 2 and

certain Scope 3 emissions against an FY23 base year. A

full list of legal entities included and excluded within our

organisational boundary is provided in Appendix 1.

Scope 1 includes GHG emissions from sources that we

own or control. This includes the fuel used in vehicles we

own or lease, natural gas, emissions generated through

the use of refrigerants, and diesel consumption from

the operation of our facilities. Our Scope 2 emissions

include indirect GHG emissions from the generation of

electricity that we purchase. These Scope 2 emissions

are different depending on whether they are calculated

using a Location-based or a market-based methodology,

and we disclose both in this report. Scope 3 includes

GHG emissions generated by our own suppliers and

customers. The most significant Scope 3 GHG emissions

which contribute to our overall carbon footprint include:

• GHG Protocol Category 1: Emissions from purchased

goods and services, primarily the production of the

products that we source (not currently measured);

• GHG Protocol Categories 4 and 9: Emissions

generated from upstream and downstream logistics/

freight (measured with some exclusions);

• GHG Protocol Category 11: Emissions associated

with the use of our products; including the electricity

used to power or wash our products (not currently

measured); and

• GHG Protocol Category 12: Emissions associated

with the disposal of our products (not currently

measured).

Methodology for measuring GHG

emissions

In measuring GHG emissions, we employ an operational

control approach for The Warehouse Limited, Warehouse

Stationery, Noel Leeming, ChocolateWorks NZ Ltd, our

New Zealand Store Support Office, and our international

sourcing hubs (China, India, and Bangladesh). Current

reported GHG emissions sources adhere to the

measurement requirements of the GHG Protocol’s

Corporate Standard, the Scope 2 Guidance, and the

Corporate Value Chain (Scope 3) Standard. During FY26,

we moved to a new GHG emissions inventory solution to

improve the collection, calculation and management of

our emissions data.

Concerning Scope 3 emissions, as of the date of this

report, we measure and report on a selected subset of

these emissions. These GHG Protocol Scope 3 categories

are:

• Category 3: Fuel and Energy-Related Activities

• Category 4: Upstream Transportation and

Distribution

• Category 5: Waste Generated in Operations

• Category 6: Business Travel

• Category 9: Downstream Transportation and

Distribution

Appendix 1 of this report outlines:

• The standards, methodologies, assumptions and

calculation methods used to prepare the inventory

• Source of emission factors and the global warming

potential (GWP) rates applied

• Emissions data for the six Kyoto Protocol greenhouse

gases, separately for Scope 1 and Scope 2 (location-

based) emissions

• Exclusions from the inventory, including their

rationale and current status

Categories 13, 14 and 15 are not currently applicable for

the Group. We will continue improving the data and

methodologies for significant unmeasured categories,

particularly purchased goods and services and the use of

sold products, so they can better inform future Scope 3

priorities and targets.

Our approach to recalculating base year emissions,

including the threshold that would trigger a restatement,

is available on our website.

Emissions reduction targets

Scope 1 and 2 targets

Our target is to reduce absolute Scope 1 and market-

based Scope 2 emissions, aligned to a 1.5-degree Celsius

trajectory, by 65% by 2030 compared to a 2023 base

year, with a pathway to net zero operational emissions

by 2040. This target was developed using the Science

Based Targets initiative (SBTi) target-setting tool. While

we believe it is aligned with SBTi’s requirements, it has not

been validated by them.

This target does not rely on the use of voluntary offsets,

but in the context of Scope 2 emissions it does rely on our

partnership with renewable energy generator Lodestone

Energy. All electricity that Lodestone Energy generates

under its arrangements with the Group is certified 100%

renewable and has zero emissions through the New

Zealand Energy Certificate (NZEC) System maintained by

BraveTrace. This energy is matched and verified against

electricity purchased by the Group. A total of 67,684 NZEC

certificates, the equivalent of 67,684 megawatt-hours

(MWh) of electricity, were redeemed against the Group

over FY26 from solar generation at the Edgecumbe,

Kaitaia and Waiotahe Lodestone Energy solar farms,

representing 90% of our total electricity for the reporting

period.

Our long-term partnership with Lodestone Energy

also supports additional renewable generation in New

Zealand, contributing towards New Zealand’s aspirational

goal to achieve 100% renewable electricity generation by

2030.

International standards governing corporate emissions

targets and Scope 2 accounting are evolving. The SBTi

published its Corporate Net-Zero Standard V2.0 in June

2026. The GHG Protocol is separately revising its Scope

2 Guidance, with proposed changes including more

granular time and geographic matching requirements for

market-based electricity claims. As these requirements

are finalised and implemented, we will review our Scope 1

and 2 target, our market-based Scope 2 methodology and

the continued treatment of electricity supplied through

our Lodestone Energy partnership.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202627

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Scope 3 priorities and supplier
engagement

Footprinting work carried out in FY24 estimated that

Scope 3 represents more than 90% of our overall

emissions footprint, with purchased goods and services

under Category 1 accounting for around 70% of Scope

3. These estimated emissions are not included in our

reported and assured GHG inventory due to underlying

data-quality and completeness limitations, but they

reinforce why supplier engagement, particularly at factory

level, is central to our Scope 3 approach.

We had intended to define our Scope 3 priorities more

precisely in FY26. Doing this credibly depends not only

on understanding where emissions sit, but also on

whether suppliers can measure and reduce them. This

is why supplier capability has become our immediate

focus. Since February 2025, we have used the ERSA

Verified Carbon SAQ tool to assess factories across carbon

accounting, energy and emissions-reduction activity,

target-setting and governance, with results independently

verified and graded from A, strong maturity, to D, low

maturity. In FY26, direct-sourcing private-label factories

representing 55% of spend had completed an assessment.

Completion is now a qualification requirement for

factories with significant spend.

In FY27, we plan to incorporate carbon-management

maturity into our Supplier Scorecard, which underpins

the sustainability ratings used in our Sustainable Supply

Chain Finance programme with HSBC. This reflects our

move beyond a supplier-engagement goal focused

primarily on science-based target adoption. A target

alone is not enough without the capability to measure

emissions, deliver reductions and maintain effective

governance. Our strongest relationships and greatest

influence sit within our direct-sourcing factory base,

which supplies around 90% of our private-label product

lines.

Most of our assessed factories currently sit at the lowest

maturity grade, reflecting the genuine starting point

across much of our supply base, while those with any

form of emissions-reduction target represent 33% of

FY26 direct-sourcing spend. By 2028, our aim is for the

majority of our direct-sourcing factories, by spend, to be

progressing beyond foundational carbon-management

practices. By 2030, our aim is for the majority to have

reached moderate maturity. We will continue reviewing

our approach as international standards, including SBTi’s

Corporate Net-Zero Standard and supplier capability

evolve.

Performance against Scope 1 and 2

targets

The table on page 29 summarises our operational GHG

emissions data for the reporting period (4 August 2025 to

2 August 2026) and our baseline data from 2023 for our

Scope 1 and market-based Scope 2 target.

Target

Reduce absolute Scope 1 and market-based

Scope 2 emissions aligned to a 1.5-degree Celsius

trajectory by 65% by 2030 compared to a 2023

base year, with a pathway to net zero operational

emissions by 2040.

FY26 Performance

In FY26, our absolute Scope 1 and market-based

Scope 2 emissions were 74.2% below our FY23

base year, exceeding our 65% reduction target for

2030 four years early. The reduction was primarily

driven by electricity matched with renewable

generation through our Lodestone Energy

partnership, alongside lower Scope 1 refrigerant

emissions following improvements to HVAC

maintenance.

We will continue to report progress against the

target while reviewing its future form and the

underlying market-based Scope 2 methodology as

international standards evolve.

Scope 1

Scope 1 emissions decreased 25.3% this year compared

with FY25, predominantly due to lower refrigerant

emissions following last year’s HVAC maintenance

programme, and the replacement of some older HVAC

units. Emissions were broadly consistent with our FY23

base year (up 1.8%).

Scope 2

Our Scope 2 market-based emissions have decreased

93% since FY23, largely due to our renewable energy

partnership with Lodestone Energy. The partnership

matches our electricity use with renewable generation

and supports investment in new renewable energy

capacity in New Zealand.

Location-based Scope 2 emissions decreased 34.7%

from FY25 and 3% from FY23. Electricity consumption

across our core New Zealand operations remained

broadly consistent with FY25, meaning the year-on-year

reduction primarily reflected a return to a less emissions-

intensive New Zealand electricity generation mix and,

consequently, lower grid-average emission factors. FY25

factors reflected increased fossil-fuelled generation during

a period of lower hydro inflows.

Scope 3

Measured Scope 3 emissions have increased 65.8% from

our FY23 base year, primarily due to higher upstream

transportation and distribution emissions.

During migration to a new emissions inventory tool, we

identified an error in data from one freight supplier that

understated FY25 Category 4 emissions by 2,422.1 tCO

2

e.

We have restated FY25 figures, increasing Category 4

emissions by 9.3% and the total measured inventory by

6.8%.

Compared with restated FY25 figures, Scope 3 emissions

increased 24.9% in FY26, including a 17.6% increase

in Category 4. This primarily reflected a combination

of higher emissions intensity under our new freight

forwarder’s supplier-specific calculations and lower

use of a lower-emissions shipping fuel mix due to

commercial considerations. Changes in data coverage

and classification also contributed, including the

reclassification of public-facing electric vehicle (EV)

charger emissions to Category 3 and the inclusion

of additional upstream and well-to-tank emissions

associated with fuels and electricity reported in Scopes 1

and 2.

During the year, we began improving freight efficiency

through a new freight-forwarding contract and fewer

stock movements between the North and South Islands.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202628

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

FY26 GHG emissions inventory
The table below summarises our operational GHG emissions data for the reporting period (4 August 2025 to 2 August 2026) and comparisons have been provided against FY25 and

our base year of FY23.

GHG Emissions (tCO

2

e)

1

This year

FY26

Last year

FY25

Base year

FY23

% change since last year% change since base year

Scope 1 2,308.8 3,088.8 2,268.2 -25.3% 1.8%

Scope 2 (Location-based) 4,922.3 7,538.1 5,067.0 -34.7% -2.9%

Scope 2 (Market-based) 638.4 3,167.3 9,176.2 -79.8% -93.0%

Sub-total: Scope 1 and 2 (Location-based) 7,231.1 10,626.9 7,335.2 -32.0% -1.4%

Sub-total: Scope 1 and 2 (Market-based) 2,947.2 6,256.1 11,444.3 -52.9% -74.2%

Scope 3

Category 3: Fuel and energy-related

activities

2,954.9 589.0 719.5 401.7% 310.7%

Category 4: Upstream transportation and

distribution

33,393.4 28,398.9 19,244.3 17.6% 73.5%

Category 5: Waste generated in operations 922.1 408.7 587.2 125.6% 57.0%

Category 6: Business travel 1,692.4 1,375.0 1,778.6 23.1% -4.8%

Category 9: Downstream freight 711.2 979.9 1,603.7 -27.4% -55.7%

Category 13: Downstream leased assets NA 11.4 NA NA NA

Sub-total: Scope 3 39,674.0 31,762.9 23,933.3 24.9% 65.8%

Total: Scope 1, 2 (Location-based) and

Scope 3 emissions

46,905.1 42,389.8 31,268.4 10.7% 50.0%

Total: Scope 1, Scope 2 (Market-based)

and Scope 3 emissions

42,621.2 38,019.0 35,377.6 12.1% 20.5%

Emissions intensity ratio (tCO

2

e / $million

of Revenue)

2


14.1 12.310.9 14.4% 29.2%

1. There are some gaps in the inventory, listed as exclusions in Table 4 in Appendix 1

2. GHG emissions intensity has been calculated using Scope 1, Scope 2 (market-based) & Scope 3 total measured emissions.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202629

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

FY26 energy consumption
1

FY26 consumptionUnitsFY26 energy (GJ)

5

Change from FY25(%)

Non-renewable fuel consumed

Diesel 455,828.4 Litres 17,594.8 -12.6

LPG

2

453,384.3 Litres 11,653.0 26.1

Petrol (all grades)

3

46,512.0 Litres 1,590.7 -15.9

Sub-total955,724.7 Litres 30,838.5 -1.3

Renewable fuel consumed

Solar PV-rooftop

4

49,926 kWh 179.7 -68.2

Sub-total49,926 kWh 179.7 -68.2

Electricity consumed

Electricity purchased75,329,226.9 kWh 271,185.2 -0.4

Sub-total75,329,226.9 kWh 271,185.2 -0.4

Total energy consumption302,203.4 -0.6

FY26 Energy intensity ratio

99.8 GJ per $m of revenue (FY25: 98.5 GJ per $m).

1. Includes diesel, LPG, petrol and electricity consumption within the Group’s New Zealand based operations aligned to our Scope 1 and 2 emissions reporting but excludes our overseas sourcing hubs and ChocolateWorks our joint venture chocolate factory.

2. LPG is reported in kilogrammes for emissions purposes and converted to litres for energy reporting.

3. Petrol (all grades) includes both regular and premium as they have identical energy content per litre despite different octane ratings.

4. Solar PV generated at our Warkworth store, all consumed on site. Generation was lower than FY25 due to reported equipment performance issues at the site.

5. Energy content factors from the Australian National Greenhouse Accounts Factors 2026 have been used for all fuel conversions to GJ. These factors are unchanged from the 2025 edition. The conversion of electricity from kWh to GJ is a standard SI conversion.

Assurance of GHG emissions

The assurance for our FY26 GHG emissions inventory has been obtained externally by Bureau Veritas. Limited assurance has been achieved for Scope 1 and 2 emissions and selected

Scope 3 emissions and energy consumption (see tables above). This assurance engagement was undertaken in accordance with International Standard on Assurance Engagements

(New Zealand) 3000: Assurance Engagements other than Audits or Reviews of Historical Financial Information; and International Standard on Assurance Engagements (New

Zealand) 3410: Assurance Engagements on Greenhouse Gas Statements, issued by the New Zealand Auditing and Assurance Standards Board; as well as informed by Bureau Veritas’

standard procedures and guidelines for external verification of sustainability reporting. See Appendix 3 for a copy of the Bureau Veritas independent limited assurance report.

Change in energy consumption from FY25

1,791.6 GJ reduction (0.6%) compared to FY25

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202630

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

The Group recognises that robust corporate governance
and management of sustainability risks and opportunities,

including climate-related matters, are essential to

protecting and growing our business in the interests of

customers, team members and stakeholders, and creating

long-term sustainable returns for shareholders.

The Role of our Board

As part of a wider effort to streamline the Group’s

management and governance arrangements, a number

of important changes were made this year. In November

2025, the Board decided to disestablish the Environmental

and Social Sustainability Committee. Its responsibilities

transferred to the Board, with related risk management

and non-financial reporting responsibilities moving to

the Audit and Risk Committee (ARC). The Board and ARC

Charters were updated in April 2026 to reflect this.

The Board now directly oversees the Group’s sustainability

strategy, sets objectives and targets, holds Management

accountable, and approves this report ahead of

publication. The Board meets at least nine times a year.

During the year, the Board received monthly updates

on sustainability matters. It also considered how our

sustainability priorities align with the Group’s wider

strategy.

The ARC, under its amended Charter, oversees

sustainability-related risk management as part of the

Group’s overall approach to enterprise risk management

and non-financial reporting, including this report, the

assurance framework, and management’s progress against

our objectives, metrics and targets. It meets at least four

times a year, and in June 2026 was updated on progress

against sustainability-related risks and our approach

to FY26 sustainability reporting as a result of proposed

changes to the mandatory climate-related disclosures

regime.

The Role of our

Management Team

Consistent with the above changes, responsibility for

driving delivery of our sustainability priorities across the

business now sits directly with our Executive Leadership

Team (ELT), supported by senior managers and functional

teams across the Group. The CEO is accountable for

delivery of the Group’s sustainability programme,

supported on the ELT by the Chief Legal, Corporate Affairs

and Sustainability Officer. Day to day, our Sustainability

and Ethical Sourcing team, led by the GM Sustainability

and Ethical Sourcing, shapes strategy, policy and

reporting, working closely with Internal Audit and Risk,

Corporate Strategy, and Legal and Corporate Affairs.

During the year, the ELT reviewed how our sustainability

approach aligns with the Group’s broader strategic

direction as part of the wider strategy process. This

included how community and people agendas sit

alongside our long-standing environmental commitments.

Managing

Sustainability-related

Risks

The Group’s Enterprise Risk Management Framework,

approved by the ELT, applies to all enterprise risks across

four categories: strategic, financial, operational and

business. It enables us to identify, assess, control and

monitor risk while responding to a fast-moving retail

environment. Management-level responsibility sits with

the ELT, supported by the Head of Internal Audit and Risk,

GMs and senior manager risk stewards, with risk insights

reported periodically to the ELT and ARC.

A significant step this year has been to bring our

sustainability-related risks fully inside this framework.

Although we expect to fall outside the mandatory climate-

related disclosures regime, we continue to assess and

respond to the key climate-related risks identified through

our earlier disclosure work. Sustainability-related risks are

now managed alongside the Group’s other key risks under

three areas: climate-related disruption, human rights and

modern slavery, and sustainable business practices. For

each, we have identified primary mitigations and controls,

and progress is monitored and reported to the ELT and

ARC each quarter. Key risk indicators have been identified

for each, though a number are still being developed and

refined as data and reporting processes mature.

Sustainability-related opportunities continue to be

identified and progressed through our wider sustainability

strategy work.

Sustainability Risk Profile 2026

Details of our Group risk management framework

are included in our FY26 Annual Report. Here, we

summarise the key changes to our sustainability-

related risks during the past 12 months:

• Overall, our sustainability-related risks remained

broadly stable, with existing mitigations

considered appropriate to the current risk

profile.

• Brand and reputational trust, our ability to meet

stakeholder expectations across environmental,

social and ethical matters, continues to be an

area of focus, as customers, investors and other

stakeholders increasingly expect to see clear

evidence of action, not just intent.

• Climate-related disruption remains an area we

are watching closely. New Zealand experienced

repeated extreme weather events during the

year, resulting in numerous local states of

emergency. The Group continued to experience

associated trading and operational disruption,

the most significant being the extended closure

of our Oamaru Noel Leeming store following

severe flooding in July 2026. However, these

events were not considered material in financial

terms.

• Human rights and modern slavery, and broader

sustainable business practices risk, continue

to be actively monitored, particularly given

uncertainty regarding the timing and progress

of proposed legislation, including modern

slavery and product stewardship reforms,

ahead of the New Zealand General Election in

November 2026, which might influence our

assessment of these risks and the processes and

mitigations required to manage them.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202632

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Our Approach

to Sustainability

GRI DisclosuresAppendices

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Global Reporting Initiative
(GRI) Disclosures

The Group has reported in accordance with the GRI Standards for the period 4 August
2025 to 2 August 2026. In preparing this report, we applied the GRI reporting principles

of Accuracy, Balance, Clarity, Comparability, Completeness, Sustainability Context,

Timeliness and Verifiability.

We reviewed our material topics through an internal assessment involving the ELT

and selected direct reports. The assessment considered the significance of the Group’s

impacts on the economy, environment and people, alongside stakeholder importance

and the operational and financial relevance of each topic to the Group. It also considered

actual and potential impacts on people and the environment, informed by operational

knowledge and ongoing stakeholder engagement.

The review reaffirmed our existing material topics and identified community impact as an

additional topic, reflecting the importance of our role in supporting communities across

Aotearoa New Zealand. No other significant changes were identified.

The assessment informed the material topics and related disclosures in this report in

accordance with GRI 3: Material Topics 2021. The following pages explain why each topic is

material, how the Group manages its impacts and how performance is measured.

The Group operates in the New Zealand retail sector, for which no GRI Sector Standard is

currently available. Refer to pages 35-43 for the GRI Content Index.

Material Topics

Importance to Stakeholders

1.002.003.004.005.00

5.00

4.00

3.00

2.00

1.00

0.00

Value at Stake

Sustainable products and packaging

Waste reduction

Employee engagement, diversity and inclusion

Supply chain management

Responsible and ethical sourcing

Community impact

GHG emissions

Employee health, safety and wellbeing

Business ethics and human rights

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202634

GRI Disclosures

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Appendices

Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting
Material Topic Impact / Commitment How we measure performance GRI Reporting

Standard

Where reported

Sustainable products

and packaging

To increase the share of private label sales from products

with at least one approved sustainability attribute to

100% by 2035.

Percentage of private-label sales derived from products with one or more sustainability

features.

N/ASustainability Report

p.10

To phase out unnecessary or problematic single use

plastics from our private label products and ensure all

product packaging meets our sustainability requirements

by 2035.

Percentage of private-label sales derived from products with packaging which can be

recycled via New Zealand’s kerbside recycling infrastructure, or circularity solutions.

N/ASustainability Report

p.10

To pilot at least one innovative proposition or initiative

each year which aims to help products last longer or

reduce waste.

Number of initiatives each year which help products last longer, or help customers reduce

waste.

N/ASustainability Report

pp.10–13

Supply chain

management

To build a reliable and sustainable supply chain networkStockturn.N/AAnnual Report

pp.14–15 and 18–19

Supplier assessments and results.GRI 414-1

GRI 414-2

Sustainability Report

pp.20–23

GHG emissionsTo reduce Scope 1 and market-based Scope 2 emissions,

aligned to a 1.5-degree Celsius trajectory, by 65% by 2030

compared to FY23 base year and on a pathway to net zero

operational emissions by 2040.

Absolute Scope 1 and market-based Scope 2 emissions, measured against the FY23 base

year.

GRI 305-1

GRI 305-2

Sustainability Report

pp.27–29, 46, 50

To progress meaningful Scope 3 emissions reductions in

high-impact and influenceable areas.

Progress in improving data and methodologies for significant Scope 3 categories, together

with supplier carbon-management maturity and measured Scope 3 emissions.

GRI 305-3Sustainability Report

pp.27–29, 47–49

To meaningfully improve the energy-efficiency of our

buildings and domestic and international logistics

activities by 2030 (compared to 2023).

Total energy consumption, energy intensity and reductions in energy consumption,

together with progress on building and logistics efficiency initiatives.

GRI 302-1

GRI 302-3

GRI 302-4

Sustainability Report

p.30

Waste reductionTo demonstrably reduce total waste from our activities

in New Zealand and divert at least 90% of waste that’s

produced from landfill by 2035.

Percentage of waste diverted from landfill year on year.GRI 306-1

GRI 306-2

GRI 306-3

GRI 306-4

GRI 306-5

Sustainability Report

p.11, p.51

To enable at least 80% of Kiwis to access solutions to

reuse or recycle a minimum of five difficult to recycle

items by 2035.

Number of tonnes of post-consumer waste recycled.N/ASustainability Report

pp.10–13

Responsible and ethical

sourcing

We will source ethically and responsibly. Number of new and existing production sites assessed against social and environmental

criteria, assessment results and actions taken in response to identified impacts.

GRI 308-1

GRI 308-2

GRI 407-1

GRI 408-1

GRI 409-1

GRI 414-1

GRI 414-2

Sustainability Report

pp.20–23

To build carbon-management maturity across our direct-

sourcing factories.

Percentage of direct-sourcing private-label factory spend covered by independently

verified carbon-management maturity assessments, and the proportion of assessed

factories progressing beyond foundational maturity.

GRI 305-3Sustainability Report

p.28

Membership of relevant sustainability initiatives and associationsGRI 2-28Sustainability Report

p.52

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202635

GRI Disclosures

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Appendices

Material Topic Impact / Commitment How we measure performance GRI Reporting
Standard

Where reported

Employee health, safety

and wellbeing

To provide a safe and supportive workplace and promote

the health and wellbeing of our team members.

Number of violent and aggressive behaviour events

Number of recorded critical risk events

Total Recordable Injury Frequency Rate

Lost Time Injury Frequency Rate

Workplace fatalities

GRI 403-9Sustainability Report

p.16

Employee engagement,

diversity and inclusion

To foster an engaged, diverse and inclusive culture in

which team members can develop, feel connected and

thrive.

Employee Net Promoter Score and MyVoice participation

Learning hours and participation in leadership and capability programmes

Programmes for upgrading employee skills

Promotion of worker health and wellbeing

GRI 403-6

GRI 404-1

GRI 404-2

Pages 15–16

Percentage of senior leaders who are women

Group-wide median gender pay gap

GRI 405-1

GRI 405-2

Annual Report

pp.74–75

Sustainability Report

p.16

Business ethics and

human rights

To operate ethically, respect human rights and report

openly and transparently on our policies, impacts and

performance.

Adherence to NZX Corporate Governance Code, Principle 1GRI 2-23 to 2-27Annual Report p.64

Compliance with Code of Ethics, Financial Products Trading Policy and Market Disclosure

Policy

GRI 205-2

GRI 205-3

GRI 206-1

Annual Report p.64

Sustainability Report

pp.20–22

Supplier and production-site labour, human-rights, social and environmental assessments,

findings and corrective actions.

GRI 407-1

GRI 408-1

GRI 409-1

GRI 414-1

GRI 414-2

Sustainability Report

pp.20–23

Community impactTo support New Zealand communities through long-term

partnerships, community investment and programmes

that respond to local needs.

Value contributed to charities and community organisations; funds raised by customers

and team members; volunteering hours; and participation in key community and youth

programmes.

GRI 3-3Sustainability Report

pp.18–19

General Disclosures

Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

2-1 Organisation details Directory (AR)

Financial Statements, Note 1.1 (AR)

About The Warehouse Group (SR)

24–25, 38–39, 82–838

2-2 Entities included in the organisation’s sustainability

reporting

Financial Statement, Note 1.3 (AR)

About this report (SR)

Methodology for measuring GHG emissions (SR)

Appendix 1 (SR)

38–392, 27, 45–46

2-3 Reporting period, frequency and contact point Financial Statements, Note 1.5 (AR)

About this report (SR)

38–392

2-4 Restatements of information Metrics and Targets – GHG emissions inventory (SR)-28–29

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202636

GRI Disclosures

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Appendices

Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

2-5 External assurance Assurance of GHG emissions (SR)

Appendix 3 (SR)

-30, 53–54

2-6 Activities, value chain and other business relationships Our Brands (AR)

About The Warehouse Group (SR)

Our value chain (SR)

24–25, 26–318

2-7 Employees Celebrating Diversity and Inclusion (AR)

Our People (SR)

74–7515–16

2-8 Workers who are not employees A small number of workers who are not employees perform services on the Group’s sites

through third-party contract arrangements. These workers are not controlled by the Group.

--

2-9 Governance structure and composition Corporate Governance (AR)64–67-

2-10 Nomination and selection of the highest governance

body

Governance Report – Board Composition and Performance (AR)64–65-

2-11 Chair of the highest governance body Corporate Governance – Chair (AR)64-65-

2-12 Role of the highest governance body in overseeing the

management of impacts

Corporate Governance – Board Committees (AR)

Our approach to sustainability governance and risk management (SR)

www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/about-us/corporate-governance

66–6732

2-13 Delegation of responsibility for managing impacts Our Board (AR)

Executive Leadership Team (AR)

Board Committees (AR)

Role of our management team (SR)

60–63, 66–6732

2-14 Role of the highest governance body in sustainability

reporting

Board Committees (AR)

Role of our Board (SR)

www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/about-us/corporate-governance

66–6732

2-15 Conflicts of interest Director Independence and Conflicts (AR)

Directors Shareholding and Substantial Product Holders (AR)

64–65, 76–77-

2-16 Communication of critical concerns Risk Management (AR)

Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)

20–23, 64, 72–73-

2-17 Collective knowledge of the highest Governance body Corporate Governance – Board Skills Matrix (AR)66–67-

2-18 Evaluation of the performance of the highest Governance

body

Corporate Governance – Board Evaluation (AR)66–67-

2-19 Remuneration Policies Remuneration Report (AR)68–70-

2-20 Process to determine remuneration Remuneration Report (AR)68–70-

2-21 Annual compensation ratio Remuneration Report (AR)71

2-22 Statement of sustainable development strategy Our Sustainable Living Plan (SR)

Transition planning (SR)

Overview of our Climate Transition Plan (SR)

-9, 25–26

2-23 Policy commitments Group Corporate Governance and Policies (AR, website)

Ethical Sourcing Policy (SR, website)

6420

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202637

GRI Disclosures

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Appendices

Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

2-24 Embedding policy commitments Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)

Reporting and Disclosure (AR)

Risk Management (AR)

Celebrating Diversity and Inclusion (AR)

Our Sustainable Living Plan (SR)

Trading Ethically and Responsibly (SR)

64, 68, 74–759, 20–23

2-25 Processes to remediate negative impacts Risk Management (AR)

Financial Risk Management, Note 12 (AR)

Corporate Governance – Risk Management (AR)

Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)

Audit performance and findings (SR)

Supplier engagement & development (SR)

20–23, 48–50, 72–7320, 22–23

2-26 Mechanisms for seeking advice and raising concerns Risk Management (AR)

Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards, Code of Ethics (AR)

20–23, 64-

2-27 Compliance with laws and regulations The Warehouse pleaded guilty to nine representative charges laid by the Commerce

Commission for supplying, offering to supply and/or advertising to supply a Roo Crew Take-

Apart Vehicle toy with 3 variants that did not meet the relevant Product Safety Standards

(Children’s Toys) Regulations 2005. A fine was imposed of $234,000. There have been no

other significant instances or fines imposed for non-compliance with laws and regulations

during the reporting period.

--

2-28 Membership associations Appendix 2 – Initiatives and Associations -52

2-29 Approach to stakeholder engagements Integrated Report (AR)

Our People (SR)

Our Communities (SR)

Global Reporting Initiative Disclosures (SR)

18–1915–16, 18–19, 34

2-30 Collective bargaining agreements Currently, 16.9% of our employees are covered by collective agreements. --

Material Topics

Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-1 Process to determine material topics Global Reporting Initiative Disclosures (SR)-34

3-2 List of material topics Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)-34

3-3 Management of material topics Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting and relevant topic sections (SR)-35–36

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202638

GRI Disclosures

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Appendices

Topic Disclosures – Economic
GRI 205: Anti-Corruption (2016)

Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management of material topics Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)

Trading Ethically and Responsibly (SR)

Risk Management (AR)

Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)

20–23, 6420, 35–36

205-2 Communication and training about anti-corruption

policies and procedures

In FY26, our Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy was communicated to all new team

members, and team members across the business were assigned mandatory Anti-Bribery

and Corruption training. Overall, 95.5% of team members completed the training, including

82.7% of Store Support Office team members, 97.7% of Store team members and 94%

of Distribution Centre team members. Team members will be required to complete the

training again in 2028.

--

205-3 Confirmed incidents of corruption and actions taken Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)

Audit performance and findings (SR)

-20, 22

GRI 206: Anti-Competitive Behaviour (2016)

Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management of material topics Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)

Risk Management (AR)

Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)

20–23, 6435–36

206-1 Legal actions for anti-competitive behaviour, anti-trust

and monopoly practices

We are not aware of any legal cases against the organisation regarding anti-competitive

behaviour or violations of anti-trust and monopoly legislation during the reporting period.

--

Topic Disclosures – Environmental

GRI 302: Energy (2016)

StandardDisclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management of material topics Integrated Report (AR)

Our Sustainable Living Plan – Sustainable Operations (SR)

Transition planning (SR)

Metrics and Targets – Energy consumption (SR)

Governance and risk management (SR)

Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)

18–199, 11, 25, 30, 32, 35

302-1 Energy consumption within the organisation Metrics and Targets – Energy consumption (SR) -30

302-3 Energy intensity Metrics and Targets – Energy consumption (SR)-30

302-4 Reduction of energy consumption Metrics and Targets – Energy consumption (SR)- 30

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202639

GRI Disclosures

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Appendices

GRI 305: Emissions (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management of material topics Integrated Report (AR)

Our Sustainable Living Plan (SR)

Our Climate Transition and Emissions (SR)

Governance and risk management (SR)

Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)

18–199, 25–26, 32, 35

305-1 Scope 1 GHG emissions Metrics and Targets – GHG emissions inventory (SR)-29, 46, 50

305-2 Scope 2 GHG emissions Scope 1 and 2 targets (SR)

Metrics and Targets – GHG emissions inventory (SR)

-27, 29, 46, 50

305-3 Scope 3 GHG emissions Emissions categories (SR)

Methodology for measuring GHG emissions (SR)

Scope 3 priorities and supplier engagement (SR)

Metrics and Targets – GHG emissions inventory (SR)

-27–29, 47–49

305-4 GHG emissions intensity Metrics and Targets – GHG emissions inventory (SR)-29

305-5 Reduction of GHG emissionsPerformance against Scope 1 and 2 targets (SR)

Metrics and Targets – GHG emissions inventory (SR)

-28–29

GRI 306: Waste (2020)

Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management of material topics Integrated Report (AR)

Our Sustainable Living Plan – Circular Solutions and Sustainable Operations (SR)

Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)

Governance and risk management (SR)

18–1910–11, 32, 35

306-1 Waste generation and significant waste-related impacts Our Sustainable Living Plan – Reduced Waste and Post Consumer Solutions -11

306-2 Management of significant waste-related impacts Our Sustainable Living Plan – Reduced Waste and Post Consumer Solutions (SR)

Transition planning (SR)

-11, 25

306-3 Waste generated Our Sustainable Living Plan – Reduced Waste (SR)

Metrics and Targets – GHG inventory, Scope 3 Category 5 (SR)

-11, 29

306-4 Waste diverted from disposal Our Sustainable Living Plan – Reduced Waste and Post Consumer Solutions (SR)-11

306-5 Waste directed to disposal Our Sustainable Living Plan – Reduced Waste (SR)-11

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202640

GRI Disclosures

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Appendices

GRI 307: Environmental Compliance (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management of material topics Integrated Report (AR)

Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)

Governance and risk management (SR)

18–2332, 35–36

307-1 Non-compliance with environmental laws and

regulations

We are not aware of any incidents related to non-compliance with environmental laws and

regulations during the reporting period.

--

GRI 308: Supplier Environmental Assessment (2016)

Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management of material topics Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)

FY26 Ethical Sourcing Programme (SR)

Ethical Sourcing Policy (website)

-20–21

308-1 New suppliers that were screened using environmental

criteria

Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)

FY26 Ethical Sourcing Programme (SR)

-20–21

308-2 Negative environmental impacts in the supply chain and

actions taken

Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)

Audit performance and findings (SR)

-20,22

Topic Disclosures – Social

GRI 403: Occupational Health and Safety (2018)

Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management of material topics Integrated Report (AR)- Corporate Governance – Board Responsibilities (AR)

Corporate Governance – Health, Safety and Wellbeing Committee (AR)

Corporate Governance – Risk Management (AR)

Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)

Our People – Health and safety (SR)

Governance and risk management (SR)

18–19, 64, 66–67, 72–7316, 32, 35–36

403-6 Promotion of worker health Our People – Wellbeing, Inclusion and Belonging (SR)-16

403-9 Work-related injuries Our People – Health and safety (SR)-16

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202641

GRI Disclosures

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Appendices

GRI 404: Training and Education (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management of material topics Integrated Report (AR)

Corporate Governance – Board Responsibilities (AR)

Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)

Our People – Growing Leaders and Capability (SR)

18–19, 6415, 35–36

404-1 Average hours of training per year per

employee

Our People – FY26 People & Culture Snapshot (SR)-15

404-2 Programmes for upgrading employee skills and

transition assistance programs

Our People – Growing Leaders and Capability (SR)

Looking Ahead (SR)

-15–16

GRI 405: Diversity and Equal Opportunity (2016)

Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management of material topics Integrated Report (AR)

Corporate Governance – Board Responsibilities (AR)

Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)

Our People – Wellbeing, Inclusion and Belonging (SR)

18–19, 6416, 35–36

405-1 Diversity of governance bodies and employees Celebrating Diversity and Inclusion (AR)

Our People – Wellbeing, Inclusion and Belonging (SR)

74–7516

405-2 Ratio of basic salary and remuneration of

women to men

Celebrating Diversity and Inclusion (AR)

Our People – Wellbeing, Inclusion and Belonging (SR)

7516

GRI 407: Freedom of Association and Collective Bargaining (2016)

Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management approach Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)

Trading Ethically and Responsibly (SR)

Ethical Sourcing Policy (website)

6420

407-1 Operations and suppliers in which the right

to freedom of association and collective

bargaining may be at risk

Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)

Supplier engagement & development (SR)

-20, 23

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202642

GRI Disclosures

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Appendices

GRI 408: Child Labour (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management approach Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)

Trading Ethically and Responsibly (SR)

FY26 Ethical Sourcing Programme (SR)

Ethical Sourcing Policy (website)

6420–21

408-1 Operations and suppliers at significant risk for

incidents of child labour

Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)

Audit performance and findings (SR)

-20, 22

GRI 409: Forced or Compulsory Labour (2016)

Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management Approach Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)

Trading Ethically and Responsibly (SR)

FY26 Ethical Sourcing Programme (SR)

Ethical Sourcing Policy (website)

6420–21

409-1 Operations and suppliers at significant risk for

incidents of forced or compulsory labour

Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)

Audit performance and findings (SR)

-20, 22

GRI 414: Supplier Social Assessment (2016)

Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management approach Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)

Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)

Supplier engagement & development (SR)

FY26 Ethical Sourcing Programme (SR)

Ethical Sourcing Policy (website)

6420–21, 23

414-1 New suppliers that were screened using social

criteria

Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)

FY26 Ethical Sourcing Programme (SR)

-20–21

414-2 Negative social impacts in the supply chain and

actions taken

Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)

Audit performance and findings (SR)

Supplier engagement & development (SR)

-20, 22–23

Community Impact

Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page

Reference

Sustainability Report

Page Reference

3-3 Management approach Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)

Our Communities (SR)

Products that give back (SR)

Supporting Youth Pathways (SR)

-18–19, 35–36

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202643

GRI Disclosures

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

Appendices

Appendices

Appendix 1 – Greenhouse Gas Emissions Inventory Criteria
Table 1: The Warehouse Group FY26 Organisational Boundary

Entity Name Location Operational Control Emissions Source/Sink

1-Day Liquor Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

Bond and Bond Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

Boye Developments Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

ChocolateWorks NZ Limited New Zealand Yes Yes

Eldamos Investments Limited New Zealand Yes Yes

Eldamos Nominees Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

Lincoln West Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

Farran (Nine) Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

Noel Leeming Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

Noel Leeming Finance Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

Noel Leeming Financial Services Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

Noel Leeming Furniture Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

The Book Depot Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

The Market.com Limited New Zealand Yes No (amalgamated non-trading entity)

The Warehouse Group Limited New Zealand Yes No (holding company)

The Warehouse Limited New Zealand and Bangladesh Yes Yes

The Warehouse Card Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

The Warehouse Group Support Services Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

The Warehouse Investments Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

The Warehouse Management Trustee Company Limited New Zealand No No

The Warehouse Management Trustee Company Limited No. 2 New Zealand No No

The Warehouse Nominees Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

The Warehouse Planit Trustees Limited New Zealand No No (non-trading entity)

The Warehouse (Shanghai) Trading Company LimitedChinaYesYes

TWGI Operations Limited New Zealand No No (non-trading entity)

TWGA Pty Limited Australia No No (non-trading entity)

TW House Sourcing Private Limited (India) India Yes Partial – ceased operations in April 2026

TWL Australia Pty Limited Australia Yes No (non-trading entity)

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202645

Appendices

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

GRI Disclosures

Entity Name Location Operational Control Emissions Source/Sink
TWP No.1 Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

TWP No.4 Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

TWP No.5 Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)

Warehouse Stationery Limited New Zealand No No (non-trading entity)

Table 2: FY26 GHG and GWP Emissions Sources Included

The Group uses Watershed as its GHG inventory management system and applies the relevant Ministry for the Environment 2026 emission factors. The table below describes our

methodology, estimates, limitations, and instances where we have relied on other emission factors. These factors include BraveTrace’s Residual Supply mix factor, the guarantee-of-

origin emission factor applied to our LNG and biomethane shipping fuel mix, and supplier emission factors. Table 4 details the exclusions to our methodology and inventory.

GHG Protocol Category Emissions Source Methodology, Estimates and Limitations

Scope 1Mobile Combustion - Fleet

Fuel (Petrol and Diesel)

Stationary Combustion - LPG

and diesel

Fugitive Emissions -

Refrigerant Gas

Mobile Combustion

Monthly invoices and reports from our fleet-management supplier provide fuel-consumption data. The Group’s fleet includes light passenger vehicles used by Store

Support Office and regional managers; light commercial vehicles, primarily used by Noel Leeming Tech Solutions; and vehicles used to deliver Noel Leeming whiteware.

MfE 2026 mobile-combustion emission factors for premium petrol, regular petrol and diesel have been applied. We have a high level of confidence in this data.


Stationary Combustion

Monthly diesel and LPG exchange-cylinder reports are used to calculate emissions. Diesel is reported in litres, while LPG is reported in kilogrammes for emissions

purposes. The calculation assumes that the supplier reports are complete and accurate. The LPG is used in equipment such as forklifts and straddles. We also receive

reports for diesel consumed in operating stores, including sprinkler-pump systems. 2026 MfE Stationary Combustion Emissions factors for LPG and Diesel have been

applied to these emissions. We have a medium level of confidence in this data from our supplier.


Refrigerants

The HVAC systems in our stores and sites are regularly maintained by external contractors, who report the refrigerant top-ups. There is some uncertainty because

refrigerant emissions are calculated based on recorded refrigerant top-ups, which may not capture all leakage. Refrigerants used include HCFC-22 (R-22, Genetron 22 or

Freon 22), HFC-32, R-407C, R-410A, and R-438A. AR5 GWP100 factors sourced from 2026 MfE have been applied. We have a medium level of confidence in this data.

Scope 2Purchased electricity A third-party energy-management company verifies our monthly electricity invoices and raises billing, charge and consumption alerts during the data-import process. It

also provides a consolidated summary of total consumption and cost to support reconciliation with supplier invoices.

At four sites, electricity is supplied through the landlord, with billing and verification managed monthly by our finance team.

Some sites have non-time-of-use meters, and estimates are applied where invoices are not received in time for reporting. Overall, we have a medium level of confidence

in this data.

Purchased electricity for the Group’s India sourcing operations is included until April 2026, when TWG-owned operations ceased.


Location-based Emissions

The monthly electricity invoicing and reports provided to the Group are used to derive full-year consumption and converted to tCO

2

e. The emission factor applied to the

location-based emissions for the Group was sourced from Watershed using the MfE 2026 purchased grid-average electricity - calendar quarters. If quarterly electricity

emissions factors are not available for a specific quarter, the annual average value published by MfE (0.0786625) is used as a proxy. This approach has been taken in

preference to applying the same quarter from the previous year, as grid emission factors have fallen significantly year-on-year, meaning prior-year factors would produce

a less accurate result.


Market-based Emissions

The emissions factor applied to the market-based emissions for the Group was sourced from Watershed and aligns to the Residual Supply Factor (kg CO

2

e/MWh) sourced

from BraveTrace, released in August 2026. 67,684 NZEC Renewable energy certificates, which are maintained by BraveTrace, have been applied to our FY26 market-

based Emissions. The NZECs reduced our Scope 2 market-based emissions by 4,470.04 tCO

2

e. This was calculated using an annual average of the Residual Supply Factor

sourced from BraveTrace (66.05 kg CO

2

e/MWh for the 2025/2026 production year). We were not able to calculate reductions using the monthly equivalent emission factor

due to functionality limitations in our inventory management system meaning we were not able to amend this calculation. We believe the difference resulting from this

approach is immaterial and impacts our Scope 2 market-based emissions by <1%.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202646

Appendices

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

GRI Disclosures

GHG Protocol Category Emissions Source Methodology, Estimates and Limitations
Scope 3: Category 3Fuel and Energy Related

Activities

Transmission and Distribution Losses

This is the same methodology as Scope 2 emissions; however, the equivalent T&D loss emission factor is applied using MfE’s 2026 emission factors. We have a medium

level of confidence in this data as it relies on the accuracy of our Scope 2 data.


Fleet (EV charging)

Electricity consumption associated with charging our electric and plug-in hybrid passenger fleet is based on monthly invoices and reports provided by our fleet

management supplier. We apply the location-based emission factor for purchased electricity using the MfE 2026 purchased grid-average electricity - calendar quarters.

If quarterly electricity emissions factors are not available for a specific quarter, the quarterly emissions factor for the same quarter in the previous year is used as a proxy.

Our supplier is highly confident in this data.

Public facing EV charging

Monthly ChargeNet totals are obtained for each site and included in the inventory. We apply the location-based emission factor for purchased electricity using the MfE

2026 purchased grid-average electricity - calendar quarters. If quarterly electricity emissions factors are not available for a specific quarter, the quarterly emissions factor

for the same quarter in the previous year is used as a proxy. Our supplier is highly confident in this data.

Scope 3: Category 4Upstream Transportation &

Distribution

The Group tracks upstream transportation and distribution through three freight arrangements:

1. FOB (Free on Board). This is freight where the supplier is responsible for the goods until they are loaded onto a ship or a plane. This arrangement is common for stock

purchased by The Warehouse and Warehouse Stationery.

2. FID (Free into Distribution Centre). This is freight where the supplier is responsible for the goods until they are delivered to one of our DCs.

3. FIS (Free into Store). This is freight where the supplier is responsible for the goods until they are delivered into a store. This is common for Noel Leeming stock.

For FOB we calculate international freight emissions for products and the domestic freight emissions for these products as they move to our Distribution Centres (DC)

and stores. For FID and FIS, we calculate the associated freight from the point we order the stock. For example, if a washing machine is purchased FIS for Noel Leeming,

we calculate the freight from the location of the washing machine when we order it, through to its delivery in store.


Suppliers provide us with freight reports monthly. Our freight reporting has significant uncertainties and limitations. These are primarily due to the bespoke

methodologies between suppliers and the limited visibility on all freight movements within our value chain. We will continue to work with our suppliers to understand

and address these issues. Each supplier’s data and emissions calculations rely on various assumptions, methods, and limitations. They also use different approaches to

determining the underlying quantity/activity data, which can vary in availability, support, and quality.


International Sea and Air Freight Suppliers

Our international freight forwarders provide us with monthly freight data, which we use to calculate full-year freight activity and associated tCO

2

e using supplier-specific

methodologies. We have a high level of confidence in this data. The 2026 MfE emission factors for short- and long-haul air freight and bulk carrier shipping have been

applied to the inventory, depending on the mode of transport. This excludes shipping containers covered by the fossil-based LNG and biomethane mix factor described

below. We continued to work with our sea freight partners to purchase a fossil-based LNG and biomethane shipping fuel mix supported by guarantees of origin.

However, the associated emissions reduction was 43.5% lower than in FY25, reducing the benefit from this lower-emissions fuel mix. This is a mass-balance mechanism

that allows us to purchase a lower-emissions fuel mix, even though the physical fuel used for our shipments may not be the same fuel or mix. For the shipments covered,

the fuel mix can reduce well-to-wake emissions by up to 25%. Well-to-wake emissions include all upstream and downstream marine fuel emissions, including fuel

production, delivery and use on board ships. The guarantee of origin declarations meet the requirements of the Clean Cargo Working Group and ISO 14020, ISO 14021

and ISO 14067, allowing the relevant tCO

2

e reductions to be allocated to our shipments. These declarations are provided quarterly and verified against our international

sea freight movements.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202647

Appendices

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

GRI Disclosures

GHG Protocol Category Emissions Source Methodology, Estimates and Limitations
Scope 3: Category 4Upstream Transportation &

Distribution

NZ Ports

We rely on the monthly emissions calculations from our South Island port using both road and rail freight. This calculation includes container movements at the

terminal, transport to the Midland Port, unloading at the Midland Port, the return journey to our South Island distribution centre, unloading at the distribution centre,

and the return of containers to the Midland Port. This calculation is based on generally accepted practices and standards when it is prepared. It relies on third-party

data and assumptions. Key assumptions include that road transport distances are based on the shortest possible routes and do not include deviations and assume full

container weight of 16 tonnes and empty container weight of 2.5 tonnes. We have a high level of confidence in these calculations.


Domestic Road, Rail, and Sea Freight

We use several road, rail and sea-freight suppliers to transport our freight from the holding park in Auckland, and Midland Port in Christchurch to our distribution centres

and stores. Two of these suppliers provide us with monthly reports using tonnes/km per trip, which we convert into tCO

2

e. When the trip involves travel over the Cook

Strait, and the supplier has not calculated this, an additional 97.6km is assumed. We have a medium confidence level in this data as we have limited information on

the exact stock in each trip and the suppliers’ own assumptions in preparing these reports. 2026 MfE emission factors for Longhaul heavy trucks, urban heavy trucks,

all trucks and inter-island ferries have been applied. One supplier provides us with monthly emission calculations. They assume crossing the Cook Strait is equivalent to

96.304 km. Emission sources include long haul heavy trucks, urban delivery heavy trucks, and all truck tonnes/km converted to tCO

2

e. Emission factors are sourced from

2026 MfE emission factors. They have provided us with a clear methodology. We have a medium level of confidence in this data. One supplier uses fuel usage for each

route/mode and applies the emission factor sourced from the 2025 MfE Emissions guide to calculate the total carbon emission. The total carbon emission is then divided

by its capacity to calculate the carbon per tonne. This figure is then used by the monthly km for that route to determine the tonnes of carbon emissions per month. We

have a medium level of confidence in this data as we have limited information on suppliers’ assumptions in preparing these reports.


Last Mile Road Freight

We receive reports from one of our suppliers about bulk item deliveries to our customers. Our supplier provides us with monthly reports using tonnes/km per trip we

convert this into tCO

2

e. We have a medium level of confidence in this data. 2026 MfE emissions factors for Freight Road trucks have been applied.


Non-Trade Procurement Freight

For non-trade procurement freight not covered in the above, our supplier provides us with reports with the weight, distance and pre-calculated CO

2

e of the freight. We

have a medium level of confidence in this data because the underlying transaction-level data is not available to us.

Scope 3: Category 5Waste Generated in

Operations

The data is reported monthly by waste collection providers, who weigh materials as they are collected and provide reports in kilogrammes or tonnes. This data is

converted to tCO

2

e. Supplier-reported waste data is available for the majority of our estate. Waste volumes for 10 store locations are currently estimated using waste

profiles from comparable stores, primarily where sites are located within shopping malls or where waste services are managed by local councils or municipalities and

detailed waste reporting is not available. Construction waste is included in the inventory.

Emissions are calculated using factors from Section 10.3 Waste Disposal of the Ministry for the Environment’s Measuring Emissions Catalogue 2026. Where the

destination landfill is known, the relevant landfill-specific emissions factor is applied. In Hawke’s Bay and Dunedin, waste service providers consolidate waste before

transferring it to one of several landfills in the region, some with landfill gas recovery and some without. Because the final destination landfill cannot be confirmed in

these locations, we take a conservative approach and apply the emissions factor for landfills without gas recovery. We have a medium level of confidence in the overall

waste data due to these uncertainties.

Waste from ChocolateWorks, which forms part of the Group’s organisational boundary, is reported monthly in tonnes by both of its waste collection providers. As actual

monthly waste volumes are now available, no assumptions are required regarding waste weights. The relevant 2026 waste-disposal emissions factors are applied to

these reported volumes.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202648

Appendices

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

GRI Disclosures

GHG Protocol Category Emissions Source Methodology, Estimates and Limitations
Scope 3: Category 6Business TravelFlights

The Group uses a flight booking agency to book all travel. The Group changed travel providers at the start of FY26, meaning that data was received from both providers

for a period while pre-existing bookings made through the former provider were fulfilled. A monthly report is provided that includes flight information, including

distance travelled, flight type (short/long haul), and cabin class. These are used to calculate the emissions. The data sources are considered reliable. We have a high level

of confidence in this data. 2026 MfE emissions factors for domestic, long-haul and short-haul business air travel have been applied. Specific cabin class factors were also

applied for long and short haul travel.


Hotels

The reports for accommodation include location (city and country), the service provider, date travelled, room type, and pre-calculated kgCO

2

e. The data sources are

considered reliable. We have a high level of confidence in this data. The emissions factor relevant to the applicable country is applied. Where no data is available, the New

Zealand room rate is applied which is derived from 2026 MfE emission factors.


Rental Vehicles

The rental vehicle report includes location, travel date, service provider, vehicle type and estimated mileage. We have a medium level of confidence in this data as the

mileage is estimated rather than actual. The travel booking agency has specific emissions factors for each car type (at a mode level - e.g. electric). We retain a copy of

their calculation methodology.


Private Vehicles

When our team members travel in their private vehicles, their km travelled is converted into tCO

2

e. This assumes accurate record-keeping by team members. We have a

medium level of confidence in this data. The 2026 MfE emissions factors for car average, unknown fuel type have been applied.


Other Sources

In FY25, we began reporting on business travel for several other entities that sit under the Group’s operational control. We have a medium level of confidence in this data

as we have seen improvements to the data quality since last FY. The same emissions factors as above have been applied.

Scope 3: Category 9Downstream Transportation &

Distribution

We use NZ Post’s calculation for products couriered to our customers from online sales. We are provided a monthly breakdown of carbon emissions across parcels,

pickup, processing, transportation, and delivery, and the total emissions are divided by the volume of parcels to calculate average emissions per parcel. This report

produces a customer profile emissions report associated with GHGs and is verified by Toitū Envirocare. The report is produced with an independently verified data

methodology for a transport measurement of delivery services’ environmental impact, and the data is suitable for auditing an ISO 14064-1:2018 and GHG Protocol

inventory. We have a high level of confidence in this data.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202649

Appendices

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

GRI Disclosures

Table 3: FY26 Scope 1 & Location-Based Scope 2 GHG Gases Breakdown
This table breaks down the Group’s FY26 Scope 1 and location-based Scope 2 emissions by source and by greenhouse gas, showing both carbon dioxide equivalent emissions (tCO

2

e)

and the underlying mass of each gas emitted.

TotalGHG CO

2

EQUIVALENTSGHG MASS

Emissions

1

tCO

2

e

2

CO

2

(tCO

2

e)

CH

4

(tCO

2

e)

N2O

(tCO

2

e)

SF6

4


(tCO

2

e)

HCFCs

3


(tCO

2

e)

HFCs

3


(t CO

2

e)

PFCs

4


(tCO

2

e)

CO

2

(t)CH

4

(t)N

2

O (t)SF

6

4

(t)HCFCs

3

(t)HFCs

3

(t)PFCs

4

(t)

Scope 1: Direct emissions and removals

Diesel - Stationary 139.54 139.08 0.16 0.30 - - - - 139.08 0.0057 0.0011 - - - -

Diesel - Transport 1,070.48 1,066.92 1.23 2.33 - - - - 1,066.92 0.0440 0.0088 - - - -

Petrol 125.59 120.30 1.61 3.69 - - - - 120.30 0.0574 0.0139 - - - -

LPG - Mobile 637.10 635.40 1.43 0.27 - - - - 635.40 0.0509 0.0010 - - - -

R-410A 125.16 - - - - - 125.16 - - - - - - 0.0630 -

R-22 (HCFC-22) 128.48 - - - - 128.48 - - - - - - 0.0730 - -

R-32 (HFC-32) 14.22 - - - - - 14.22 - - - - - - 0.0210 -

R-407C 68.22 - - - - - 68.22 - - - - - - 0.0420 -

R-438A 0.00 - - - - - 0.00 - - - - - - 0.0000 -

Total Scope 12,308.791,961.69 4.43 6.59 0.00 128.48 207.60 0.00 1,961.69 0.1580 0.0249 0.0000 0.0730 0.1260 0.0000

Scope 2: Indirect emissions from imported energy (Location-based)

Purchased Electricity 4,922.30 4,742.20 172.81 7.29 - - - - 4,742.20 5.7989 0.0267 - - - -

Total Scope 2 4,922.30 4,742.20 172.81 7.29 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 4,742.20 5.7989 0.0267 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

Total (Scope 1 + 2) 7,231.08 6,703.89 177.23 13.88 0.00 128.48 207.60 0.00 6,703.89 5.9569 0.0516 0.0000 0.0730 0.1260 0.0000

1. Organisational boundary The inventory covers all operations within the Group’s organisational boundary, including our sourcing hubs in China, India and Bangladesh.

2. Emission factors and global warming potentials Unless otherwise stated, calculations use the New Zealand Ministry for the Environment 2026 Emissions Factors Workbook and IPCC AR5 100-year Global Warming Potentials.

Emission factors are presented in rounded form; calculations use unrounded values, so component figures may not sum exactly to reported totals. Figures are presented to two decimal places for emissions and carbon dioxide mass,

and four decimal places for other greenhouse gas masses. The Group does not combust biomass or biofuels, and no biogenic CO

2

emissions have been identified for the reporting period.

3. Refrigerants Refrigerant emissions are calculated from actual leakage and top-up data reported by our maintenance contractors. R-22 (HCFC-22) is a hydrochlorofluorocarbon regulated under the Montreal Protocol rather than a

Kyoto Protocol gas; it is reported in a separate HCFC column and is included in the Scope 1 total above. R-438A remains in use, but no leakage was recorded during FY26.

4. Excluded greenhouse gases No emissions of sulphur hexafluoride (SF

6

), perfluorocarbons (PFCs) or nitrogen trifluoride (NF

3

) were identified during the reporting period.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202650

Appendices

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

GRI Disclosures

Table 4: FY26 GHG and GWP Emissions Sources Excluded
GHG Protocol Category

Number

GHG Protocol Category Name Full or Partial Exclusions of GHG Emissions and Rationale

Scope 1 Direct emissions No notable exclusions from the FY26 inventory.


Biogenic Emissions

The Group does not combust biomass or biofuels, and no biogenic CO

2

emissions have been identified for the reporting period.

Scope 2Indirect emissions associated with the purchase of

electricity

No notable exclusions from the FY26 inventory.

Scope 3 Upstream Emissions

1 Purchased goods & services Full exclusion from inventory. Reliable calculation of emissions not available. Work is underway to determine these emissions.

2 Capital goods (e.g. plant, property & equipment). Full exclusion from inventory. Reliable calculation of emissions not available. Work is underway to determine these emissions.

3 Fuel- and Energy-related activities Emissions from company fleet EV home charging are currently excluded due to limited access to reliable and consistent data across users. We

expect this to be immaterial.

4Upstream Transportation & DistributionNotable exclusions:

• Reverse logistics of empty containers and trucks once the product has been delivered to one of our sites.

• Inter-store transfers for The Warehouse, Warehouse Stationery and Noel Leeming.

• Emissions from unloading containers at the Ports of Auckland.

• We are aware that some stores and the Store Support Office arrange their own courier services from time to time, and we have limited visibility

over these emissions.

• International freight outside our main freight-forwarding arrangements is excluded and considered immaterial. Work is underway with our

suppliers and internal teams to further improve freight data quality and completeness.

• Freight to and from our overseas sourcing hubs and ChocolateWorks, our joint venture chocolate factory, that sits under the Group has been

excluded due to data quality issues or missing datasets. Work is underway to capture this data.

5 Waste Generated in Operations Waste from overseas sourcing hub has also been excluded due to data quality or completeness issues. Work is underway to capture this data.

6 Business Travel No notable exclusions from the FY26 inventory.

7 Employee commuting Full exclusion from inventory. Reliable calculation of emissions not available. Work has started to determine these emissions.

8 Upstream leased Assets At some leased sites, landlords control HVAC systems and other energy sources, including diesel used for sprinkler pumps. Associated emissions

are currently excluded from our inventory. Electricity used in landlord-controlled shared spaces, such as car parks and mall corridors, is also

excluded. We do not control this consumption and, in most cases, it is bundled with other occupancy charges, meaning consumption data is not

available. Work has started to determine these emissions.

Scope 3 Downstream Emissions

9 Downstream freight We do not include courier emissions from sales made by Marketplace merchants through our online platforms, as we are not the seller of record

and do not own, store, or dispatch these products. These emissions fall within the value chains of the third-party sellers. Some emissions were

incorrectly included in our FY23 inventory in relation to orders we fulfilled on behalf of third-party merchants. These emissions have been removed

from our restated inventory. Emissions associated with operating the platform itself (e.g. outsourced hosting or cloud services) would typically fall

under Scope 3, Category 1 or 2, but are currently excluded (see above).


There is a gap with store-to-store freight not being recorded accurately. Work is underway to improve the capture of this data.

10 Processing of sold products Not applicable.

11 Use of sold products Full exclusion from inventory. Reliable calculation of emissions not available. Work is underway to determine these emissions.

12 End-of-life of sold products Full exclusion from inventory. Reliable calculation of emissions not available. Work is underway to determine these emissions.

13 Downstream leased assets Not applicable in FY26.

14 Franchises Not applicable.

15 Investments Not applicable.

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202651

Appendices

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

GRI Disclosures

Appendix 2 – Initiatives and Associations
Listed below are the external economic, environmental or social initiatives to which the Group subscribes, and the main associations and national or international advocacy

organisations of which the Group is a member.

Area Initiatives Association

Environmental• Climate Leaders Coalition

• NZ Soft Plastics Recycling Scheme

• TechCollect NZ

• Retail NZ Sustainability Working Group

• Sustainable Business Council (SBC)

• Waste Management Institute New Zealand Incorporated (WasteMINZ)

• The Packaging Forum

Human Resource• UN Women Aotearoa NZ• HRNZ

• Rainbow Tick (Toitū Takatāpui)

Product Sourcing and Development • Australasian Recycling Label (ARL)

• Forest Stewardship Council

• Rainforest Alliance

• Cruelty Free International

• New Zealand Business Round Table in China (NZBRiC)

• Australian Packaging Covenant Organisation (APCO)

• Better Cotton Initiative

Other • Vocational Education with Services Workforce Development Council (WDC)

• Vocational Education training through Te Pukenga

• Applied Business Management Project, AUT

• Seniors@Work

• Retail NZ

• NZ Marketing Association

The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202652

Appendices

Our Approach

to Sustainability

IntroductionOur PeopleOur

Relationships

Our Climate

Transition and

Emissions

Our Approach to

Sustainability Governance

and Risk Management

GRI Disclosures


,1'(3(1'(17$6685$1&(5(3257



To the Stakeholders of The Warehouse Group Limited (“TWG”)



/LPLWHG$VVXUDQFH&RQFOXVLRQ

%DVHGRQWKHSURFHGXUHVZHKDYHSHUIRUPHGDQGWKHHYLGHQFHZHKDYHREWDLQHGQRWKLQJKDV

FRPHWRRXUDWWHQWLRQWKDWFDXVHVXVWREHOLHYHWKDWWKHHQHUJ\FRQVXPSWLRQHQHUJ\LQWHQVLW\

Scope 1, 2 and 3 greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions and waste disclosures (“Subject Matter

Information”), including the associated methodologies, assumptions, and estimation uncertainty

ZLWKLQWKHVFRSHRIRXUOLPLWHGDVVXUDQFHHQJDJHPHQWDVGLVFORVHGLQ7:*6XVWDLQDELOLW\5HSRUW

2026 (“the Report”) IRUWKHSHULRGRI $XJXVWWR $XJXVWDUHQRWIDLUO\SUHVHQWHGDQG

SUHSDUHGLQDOOPDWHULDOUHVSHFWVLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKH5HSRUWLQJ&ULWHULD

6FRSHRIWKH$VVXUDQFH(QJDJHPHQW

7KHVFRSHRIDVVXUDQFHZDVOLPLWHGWRWKH6XEMHFW0DWWHU,QIRUPDWLRQUHODWLQJWRTWG’sRSHUDWLQJ

DVVHWVDVOLVWHGLQTable 1: “The Warehouse Group FY26 Organisational Boundary”RIWKH 5HSRUW

IRUWKHSHULRGRI $XJXVWWR$XJXVW



















2XUDVVXUDQFHHQJDJHPHQWGLGQRWH[WHQGWRDQ\RWKHULQIRUPDWLRQLQFOXGHGLQWKH5HSRUWQRUWR

LQIRUPDWLRQUHODWLQJWRSULRUUHSRUWLQJSHULRGV:HKDYHQRWSHUIRUPHGDQ\SURFHGXUHVRQVXFK

LQIRUPDWLRQDQGDFFRUGLQJO\GRQRWH[SUHVVDFRQFOXVLRQWKHUHRQ

,QKHUHQW8QFHUWDLQW\LQSUHSDULQJ*+*GLVFORVXUHV

7KH*+*TXDQWLILFDWLRQLVVXEMHFWWRLQKHUHQWXQFHUWDLQW\GXHWRLQFRPSOHWHVFLHQWLILFNQRZOHGJH

XQGHUO\LQJ WKH GHWHUPLQDWLRQ RI HPLVVLRQ IDFWRUV DQG WKH PHWKRGRORJLHV XVHG WR FRQYHUW DQG

DJJUHJDWHGLIIHUHQWJUHHQKRXVHJDVHVLQWRDFRPPRQPHWULF HJ&2₂HTXLYDOHQW $GGLWLRQDO

XQFHUWDLQW\DULVHVIURPWKHXVHRIDVVXPSWLRQVDQGHVWLPDWLRQWHFKQLTXHVUHTXLUHGWRFDOFXODWH

HPLVVLRQV&RQVHTXHQWO\UHSRUWHGJUHHQKRXVHJDVHPLVVLRQVVKRXOGEHLQWHUSUHWHGLQWKHFRQWH[W

RIWKHVHLQKHUHQWVFLHQWLILFDQGHVWLPDWLRQXQFHUWDLQWLHV

TWG’s Responsibilities

0DQDJHPHQWRI7:* ZDVUHVSRQVLEOHIRU

 3UHSDULQJ DQG SUHVHQWLQJ WKH 6XEMHFW 0DWWHU ,QIRUPDWLRQ LQ DFFRUGDQFH ZLWK WKH

5HSRUWLQJ&ULWHULD

 (VWDEOLVKLQJDQGPDLQWDLQLQJDSSURSULDWHLQWHUQDOFRQWUROVWRHQDEOHWKHSUHSDUDWLRQRI

LQIRUPDWLRQIUHHIURPPDWHULDOPLVVWDWHPHQWZKHWKHUGXHWRIUDXGRUHUURU

 6HOHFWLQJDQGDSSO\LQJDSSURSULDWHPHWKRGVDVVXPSWLRQVDQGHVWLPDWHV

 3URYLGLQJXVZLWKDOOUHOHYDQWLQIRUPDWLRQDQGDFFHVVQHFHVVDU\WRSHUIRUPWKHDVVXUDQFH

HQJDJHPHQW

2XU5HVSRQVLELOLWLHV

Bureau Veritas Australia Pty Ltd (“Bureau Veritas”) was responsible for:

 3ODQQLQJDQGSHUIRUPLQJWKHDVVXUDQFHHQJDJHPHQWWRREWDLQOLPLWHGDVVXUDQFHRYHUWKH

6XEMHFW0DWWHU,QIRUPDWLRQ

 2EWDLQLQJ VXIILFLHQW DQG DSSURSULDWH HYLGHQFH RQ ZKLFK WR EDVH RXU DVVXUDQFH

FRQFOXVLRQV

 )RUPLQJDQLQGHSHQGHQWFRQFOXVLRQEDVHGRQWKHSURFHGXUHVSHUIRUPHGDQGHYLGHQFH

REWDLQHG

 5HSRUWLQJRXUDVVXUDQFHFRQFOXVLRQVWRWKH'LUHFWRUVRI7:* 

%XUHDX 9HULWDV ZDV QRW LQYROYHG LQ WKH SUHSDUDWLRQ RI WKH5HSRUW :H KDYH PDLQWDLQHG RXU

LQGHSHQGHQFHDQGSHUIRUPHGWKHHQJDJHPHQWLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHUHOHYDQWHWKLFDOUHTXLUHPHQWV

DSSOLFDEOHWRDVVXUDQFHHQJDJHPHQWV



6XEMHFW0DWWHU

,QIRUPDWLRQ

3DJH

UHIHUHQFH

5HSRUWLQJ&ULWHULD

(QHUJ\&RQVXPSWLRQZLWKLQWKH

2UJDQLVDWLRQ

S*5, H (QHUJ\

(QHUJ\LQWHQVLW\S*5, D (QHUJ\

'LUHFW 6FRSH *+*HPLVVLRQVSDQG

*5,(PLVVLRQV

DQG

*+*3URWRFRO&RUSRUDWH

$FFRXQWLQJDQG5HSRUWLQJ

6WDQGDUG 5HYLVHG(GLWLRQ 

 

(QHUJ\LQGLUHFW 6FRSH *+*HPLVVLRQVSDQG

2WKHULQGLUHFW 6FRSH *+*

HPLVVLRQV

S

5HGXFWLRQRI*+*HPLVVLRQVS*5,(PLVVLRQV

:DVWHJHQHUDWHGS*5,:DVWH

:DVWHGLYHUWHGIURPGLVSRVDOS

*5, D DQG F :DVWH



:DVWHGLYHUWHGWRGLVSRVDOS

*5, D DQG F :DVWH



Appendix 3 – Independent Limited Assurance Report



,1'(3(1'(17$6685$1&(5(3257



To the Stakeholders of The Warehouse Group Limited (“TWG”)



/LPLWHG$VVXUDQFH&RQFOXVLRQ

%DVHGRQWKHSURFHGXUHVZHKDYHSHUIRUPHGDQGWKHHYLGHQFHZHKDYHREWDLQHGQRWKLQJKDV

FRPHWRRXUDWWHQWLRQWKDWFDXVHVXVWREHOLHYHWKDWWKHHQHUJ\FRQVXPSWLRQHQHUJ\LQWHQVLW\

Scope 1, 2 and 3 greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions and waste disclosures (“Subject Matter

Information”), including the associated methodologies, assumptions, and estimation uncertainty

ZLWKLQWKHVFRSHRIRXUOLPLWHGDVVXUDQFHHQJDJHPHQWDVGLVFORVHGLQ7:*6XVWDLQDELOLW\5HSRUW

2026 (“the Report”) IRUWKHSHULRGRI$XJXVWWR$XJXVWDUHQRWIDLUO\SUHVHQWHGDQG

SUHSDUHGLQDOOPDWHULDOUHVSHFWVLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKH5HSRUWLQJ&ULWHULD

6FRSHRIWKH$VVXUDQFH(QJDJHPHQW

7KHVFRSHRIDVVXUDQFHZDVOLPLWHGWRWKH6XEMHFW0DWWHU,QIRUPDWLRQUHODWLQJWRTWG’sRSHUDWLQJ

DVVHWVDVOLVWHGLQTable 1: “The Warehouse Group FY26 Organisational Boundary”RIWKH5HSRUW

IRUWKHSHULRGRI$XJXVWWR$XJXVW



















2XUDVVXUDQFHHQJDJHPHQWGLGQRWH[WHQGWRDQ\RWKHULQIRUPDWLRQLQFOXGHGLQWKH5HSRUWQRUWR

LQIRUPDWLRQUHODWLQJWRSULRUUHSRUWLQJSHULRGV:HKDYHQRWSHUIRUPHGDQ\SURFHGXUHVRQVXFK

LQIRUPDWLRQDQGDFFRUGLQJO\GRQRWH[SUHVVDFRQFOXVLRQWKHUHRQ

,QKHUHQW8QFHUWDLQW\LQSUHSDULQJ*+*GLVFORVXUHV

7KH*+*TXDQWLILFDWLRQLVVXEMHFWWRLQKHUHQWXQFHUWDLQW\GXHWRLQFRPSOHWHVFLHQWLILFNQRZOHGJH

XQGHUO\LQJ WKH GHWHUPLQDWLRQ RI HPLVVLRQ IDFWRUV DQG WKH PHWKRGRORJLHV XVHG WR FRQYHUW DQG

DJJUHJDWHGLIIHUHQWJUHHQKRXVHJDVHVLQWRDFRPPRQPHWULF HJ&2₂HTXLYDOHQW $GGLWLRQDO

XQFHUWDLQW\DULVHVIURPWKHXVHRIDVVXPSWLRQVDQGHVWLPDWLRQWHFKQLTXHVUHTXLUHGWRFDOFXODWH

HPLVVLRQV&RQVHTXHQWO\UHSRUWHGJUHHQKRXVHJDVHPLVVLRQVVKRXOGEHLQWHUSUHWHGLQWKHFRQWH[W

RIWKHVHLQKHUHQWVFLHQWLILFDQGHVWLPDWLRQXQFHUWDLQWLHV

TWG’s Responsib

[TRUNCATED]

Data sourced from publicly available filings. Our datasets may not be complete. Automated analysis can produce errors. If you believe any data on this page is incorrect, please contact us at hello@nzxplorer.co.nz. For informational purposes only. Not investment advice.